• Home
  • Line#
  • Scopes#
  • Navigate#
  • Raw
  • Download
1 /* SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0-only */
2 /*
3  * mac80211 <-> driver interface
4  *
5  * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc.
6  * Copyright 2006-2007	Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz>
7  * Copyright 2007-2010	Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
8  * Copyright 2013-2014  Intel Mobile Communications GmbH
9  * Copyright (C) 2015 - 2017 Intel Deutschland GmbH
10  * Copyright (C) 2018 - 2022 Intel Corporation
11  */
12 
13 #ifndef MAC80211_H
14 #define MAC80211_H
15 
16 #include <linux/bug.h>
17 #include <linux/kernel.h>
18 #include <linux/if_ether.h>
19 #include <linux/skbuff.h>
20 #include <linux/ieee80211.h>
21 #include <linux/lockdep.h>
22 #include <linux/android_kabi.h>
23 #include <net/cfg80211.h>
24 #include <net/codel.h>
25 #include <net/ieee80211_radiotap.h>
26 #include <asm/unaligned.h>
27 
28 /**
29  * DOC: Introduction
30  *
31  * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements
32  * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document
33  * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware
34  * drivers.
35  */
36 
37 /**
38  * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts
39  *
40  * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be
41  * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any
42  * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such
43  * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the
44  * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even
45  * tasklet function.
46  *
47  * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also
48  *	 use the non-IRQ-safe functions!
49  */
50 
51 /**
52  * DOC: Warning
53  *
54  * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will
55  * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet.
56  */
57 
58 /**
59  * DOC: Frame format
60  *
61  * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver,
62  * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are
63  * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the
64  * hardware.
65  *
66  * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features:
67  *
68  * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload
69  * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware.
70  *
71  * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to
72  * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU.
73  */
74 
75 /**
76  * DOC: mac80211 workqueue
77  *
78  * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use.
79  * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by
80  * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the
81  * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback.
82  *
83  * mac80211 will flushed the workqueue upon interface removal and during
84  * suspend.
85  *
86  * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock.
87  *
88  */
89 
90 /**
91  * DOC: mac80211 software tx queueing
92  *
93  * mac80211 provides an optional intermediate queueing implementation designed
94  * to allow the driver to keep hardware queues short and provide some fairness
95  * between different stations/interfaces.
96  * In this model, the driver pulls data frames from the mac80211 queue instead
97  * of letting mac80211 push them via drv_tx().
98  * Other frames (e.g. control or management) are still pushed using drv_tx().
99  *
100  * Drivers indicate that they use this model by implementing the .wake_tx_queue
101  * driver operation.
102  *
103  * Intermediate queues (struct ieee80211_txq) are kept per-sta per-tid, with
104  * another per-sta for non-data/non-mgmt and bufferable management frames, and
105  * a single per-vif queue for multicast data frames.
106  *
107  * The driver is expected to initialize its private per-queue data for stations
108  * and interfaces in the .add_interface and .sta_add ops.
109  *
110  * The driver can't access the queue directly. To dequeue a frame from a
111  * txq, it calls ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). Whenever mac80211 adds a new frame to a
112  * queue, it calls the .wake_tx_queue driver op.
113  *
114  * Drivers can optionally delegate responsibility for scheduling queues to
115  * mac80211, to take advantage of airtime fairness accounting. In this case, to
116  * obtain the next queue to pull frames from, the driver calls
117  * ieee80211_next_txq(). The driver is then expected to return the txq using
118  * ieee80211_return_txq().
119  *
120  * For AP powersave TIM handling, the driver only needs to indicate if it has
121  * buffered packets in the driver specific data structures by calling
122  * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(). For frames buffered in the ieee80211_txq
123  * struct, mac80211 sets the appropriate TIM PVB bits and calls
124  * .release_buffered_frames().
125  * In that callback the driver is therefore expected to release its own
126  * buffered frames and afterwards also frames from the ieee80211_txq (obtained
127  * via the usual ieee80211_tx_dequeue).
128  */
129 
130 /**
131  * DOC: HW timestamping
132  *
133  * Timing Measurement and Fine Timing Measurement require accurate timestamps
134  * of the action frames TX/RX and their respective acks.
135  *
136  * To report hardware timestamps for Timing Measurement or Fine Timing
137  * Measurement frame RX, the low level driver should set the SKB's hwtstamp
138  * field to the frame RX timestamp and report the ack TX timestamp in the
139  * ieee80211_rx_status struct.
140  *
141  * Similarly, To report hardware timestamps for Timing Measurement or Fine
142  * Timing Measurement frame TX, the driver should set the SKB's hwtstamp field
143  * to the frame TX timestamp and report the ack RX timestamp in the
144  * ieee80211_tx_status struct.
145  */
146 struct device;
147 
148 /**
149  * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues
150  *
151  * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues.
152  * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set
153  */
154 enum ieee80211_max_queues {
155 	IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES =		16,
156 	IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP =	BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1,
157 };
158 
159 #define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE	0xff
160 
161 /**
162  * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211
163  * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice
164  * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video
165  * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort
166  * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background
167  */
168 enum ieee80211_ac_numbers {
169 	IEEE80211_AC_VO		= 0,
170 	IEEE80211_AC_VI		= 1,
171 	IEEE80211_AC_BE		= 2,
172 	IEEE80211_AC_BK		= 3,
173 };
174 
175 /**
176  * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration
177  *
178  * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS
179  * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29.
180  *
181  * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255]
182  * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form
183  *	2^n-1 in the range 1..32767]
184  * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min]
185  * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled
186  * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category
187  * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue
188  * @mu_edca: is the MU EDCA configured
189  * @mu_edca_param_rec: MU EDCA Parameter Record for HE
190  */
191 struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params {
192 	u16 txop;
193 	u16 cw_min;
194 	u16 cw_max;
195 	u8 aifs;
196 	bool acm;
197 	bool uapsd;
198 	bool mu_edca;
199 	struct ieee80211_he_mu_edca_param_ac_rec mu_edca_param_rec;
200 };
201 
202 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats {
203 	unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount;
204 	unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount;
205 	unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount;
206 	unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount;
207 };
208 
209 /**
210  * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context
211  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed
212  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed
213  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed
214  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel,
215  *	this is used only with channel switching with CSA
216  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH: The min required channel width changed
217  */
218 enum ieee80211_chanctx_change {
219 	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH		= BIT(0),
220 	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS	= BIT(1),
221 	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR		= BIT(2),
222 	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL	= BIT(3),
223 	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH	= BIT(4),
224 };
225 
226 /**
227  * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to
228  *
229  * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx
230  * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only.
231  *
232  * @def: the channel definition
233  * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required.
234  * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be
235  *	active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions
236  * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled
237  *	after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions;
238  *	this will always be >= @rx_chains_static.
239  * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel.
240  * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
241  *	sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
242  */
243 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf {
244 	struct cfg80211_chan_def def;
245 	struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def;
246 
247 	u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic;
248 
249 	bool radar_enabled;
250 
251 	u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
252 };
253 
254 /**
255  * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode
256  * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already
257  *	exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface
258  *	needs to be switched from one to the other.
259  * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop
260  *      to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but
261  *      will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches
262  *      from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course
263  *      implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing
264  *      hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context
265  *      will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used
266  *      for changes/removal.)
267  */
268 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode {
269 	CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF,
270 	CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS,
271 };
272 
273 /**
274  * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information
275  *
276  * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that
277  * needs to switch from one chanctx to another.  The
278  * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be
279  * done.
280  *
281  * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx
282  * @link_conf: the link conf that's switching
283  * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned
284  * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned
285  */
286 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch {
287 	struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
288 	struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf;
289 	struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx;
290 	struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx;
291 };
292 
293 /**
294  * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags
295  *
296  * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed(), link_info_changed()
297  * and vif_cfg_changed() callbacks to indicate which parameter(s) changed.
298  *
299  * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated),
300  *	also implies a change in the AID.
301  * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed
302  * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed
303  * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed
304  * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed
305  * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed
306  * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed
307  * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever
308  *	reason (IBSS and managed mode)
309  * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve
310  *	new beacon (beaconing modes)
311  * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be
312  *	enabled/disabled (beaconing modes)
313  * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed
314  * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed
315  * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed.
316  * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note
317  *	that it is only ever disabled for station mode.
318  * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface.
319  * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode)
320  * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode)
321  * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode)
322  * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface
323  * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS)
324  *	changed
325  * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available:
326  *	currently dtim_period only is under consideration.
327  * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed,
328  *	note that this is only called when it changes after the channel
329  *	context had been assigned.
330  * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed
331  * @BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS: VHT MU-MIMO group id or user position changed
332  * @BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE: keep alive options (idle period or protected
333  *	keep alive) changed.
334  * @BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE: Multicast Rate setting changed for this interface
335  * @BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER: fine timing measurement request responder
336  *	functionality changed for this BSS (AP mode).
337  * @BSS_CHANGED_TWT: TWT status changed
338  * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD: OBSS Packet Detection status changed.
339  * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR: BSS Color has changed
340  * @BSS_CHANGED_FILS_DISCOVERY: FILS discovery status changed.
341  * @BSS_CHANGED_UNSOL_BCAST_PROBE_RESP: Unsolicited broadcast probe response
342  *	status changed.
343  *
344  */
345 enum ieee80211_bss_change {
346 	BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC		= 1<<0,
347 	BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT	= 1<<1,
348 	BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE	= 1<<2,
349 	BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT		= 1<<3,
350 	BSS_CHANGED_HT			= 1<<4,
351 	BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES		= 1<<5,
352 	BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT		= 1<<6,
353 	BSS_CHANGED_BSSID		= 1<<7,
354 	BSS_CHANGED_BEACON		= 1<<8,
355 	BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED	= 1<<9,
356 	BSS_CHANGED_CQM			= 1<<10,
357 	BSS_CHANGED_IBSS		= 1<<11,
358 	BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER		= 1<<12,
359 	BSS_CHANGED_QOS			= 1<<13,
360 	BSS_CHANGED_IDLE		= 1<<14,
361 	BSS_CHANGED_SSID		= 1<<15,
362 	BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP	= 1<<16,
363 	BSS_CHANGED_PS			= 1<<17,
364 	BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER		= 1<<18,
365 	BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS		= 1<<19,
366 	BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO		= 1<<20,
367 	BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH		= 1<<21,
368 	BSS_CHANGED_OCB                 = 1<<22,
369 	BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS		= 1<<23,
370 	BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE		= 1<<24,
371 	BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE		= 1<<25,
372 	BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER	= 1<<26,
373 	BSS_CHANGED_TWT			= 1<<27,
374 	BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD		= 1<<28,
375 	BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR	= 1<<29,
376 	BSS_CHANGED_FILS_DISCOVERY      = 1<<30,
377 	BSS_CHANGED_UNSOL_BCAST_PROBE_RESP = 1<<31,
378 
379 	/* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */
380 };
381 
382 /*
383  * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number
384  * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP
385  * filtering will be disabled.
386  */
387 #define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4
388 
389 /**
390  * enum ieee80211_event_type - event to be notified to the low level driver
391  * @RSSI_EVENT: AP's rssi crossed the a threshold set by the driver.
392  * @MLME_EVENT: event related to MLME
393  * @BAR_RX_EVENT: a BAR was received
394  * @BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT: Frames were released from the reordering buffer because
395  *	they timed out. This won't be called for each frame released, but only
396  *	once each time the timeout triggers.
397  */
398 enum ieee80211_event_type {
399 	RSSI_EVENT,
400 	MLME_EVENT,
401 	BAR_RX_EVENT,
402 	BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT,
403 };
404 
405 /**
406  * enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data - relevant when event type is %RSSI_EVENT
407  * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi went below the threshold set by the driver.
408  * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi went above the threshold set by the driver.
409  */
410 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data {
411 	RSSI_EVENT_HIGH,
412 	RSSI_EVENT_LOW,
413 };
414 
415 /**
416  * struct ieee80211_rssi_event - data attached to an %RSSI_EVENT
417  * @data: See &enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data
418  */
419 struct ieee80211_rssi_event {
420 	enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data data;
421 };
422 
423 /**
424  * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
425  * @AUTH_EVENT: the MLME operation is authentication
426  * @ASSOC_EVENT: the MLME operation is association
427  * @DEAUTH_RX_EVENT: deauth received..
428  * @DEAUTH_TX_EVENT: deauth sent.
429  */
430 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data {
431 	AUTH_EVENT,
432 	ASSOC_EVENT,
433 	DEAUTH_RX_EVENT,
434 	DEAUTH_TX_EVENT,
435 };
436 
437 /**
438  * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
439  * @MLME_SUCCESS: the MLME operation completed successfully.
440  * @MLME_DENIED: the MLME operation was denied by the peer.
441  * @MLME_TIMEOUT: the MLME operation timed out.
442  */
443 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status {
444 	MLME_SUCCESS,
445 	MLME_DENIED,
446 	MLME_TIMEOUT,
447 };
448 
449 /**
450  * struct ieee80211_mlme_event - data attached to an %MLME_EVENT
451  * @data: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data
452  * @status: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status
453  * @reason: the reason code if applicable
454  */
455 struct ieee80211_mlme_event {
456 	enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data data;
457 	enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status status;
458 	u16 reason;
459 };
460 
461 /**
462  * struct ieee80211_ba_event - data attached for BlockAck related events
463  * @sta: pointer to the &ieee80211_sta to which this event relates
464  * @tid: the tid
465  * @ssn: the starting sequence number (for %BAR_RX_EVENT)
466  */
467 struct ieee80211_ba_event {
468 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
469 	u16 tid;
470 	u16 ssn;
471 };
472 
473 /**
474  * struct ieee80211_event - event to be sent to the driver
475  * @type: The event itself. See &enum ieee80211_event_type.
476  * @rssi: relevant if &type is %RSSI_EVENT
477  * @mlme: relevant if &type is %AUTH_EVENT
478  * @ba: relevant if &type is %BAR_RX_EVENT or %BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT
479  * @u:union holding the fields above
480  */
481 struct ieee80211_event {
482 	enum ieee80211_event_type type;
483 	union {
484 		struct ieee80211_rssi_event rssi;
485 		struct ieee80211_mlme_event mlme;
486 		struct ieee80211_ba_event ba;
487 	} u;
488 };
489 
490 /**
491  * struct ieee80211_mu_group_data - STA's VHT MU-MIMO group data
492  *
493  * This structure describes the group id data of VHT MU-MIMO
494  *
495  * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
496  * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
497  */
498 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data {
499 	u8 membership[WLAN_MEMBERSHIP_LEN];
500 	u8 position[WLAN_USER_POSITION_LEN];
501 };
502 
503 /**
504  * struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params - FTM responder parameters
505  *
506  * @lci: LCI subelement content
507  * @civicloc: CIVIC location subelement content
508  * @lci_len: LCI data length
509  * @civicloc_len: Civic data length
510  */
511 struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params {
512 	const u8 *lci;
513 	const u8 *civicloc;
514 	size_t lci_len;
515 	size_t civicloc_len;
516 };
517 
518 /**
519  * struct ieee80211_fils_discovery - FILS discovery parameters from
520  * IEEE Std 802.11ai-2016, Annex C.3 MIB detail.
521  *
522  * @min_interval: Minimum packet interval in TUs (0 - 10000)
523  * @max_interval: Maximum packet interval in TUs (0 - 10000)
524  */
525 struct ieee80211_fils_discovery {
526 	u32 min_interval;
527 	u32 max_interval;
528 };
529 
530 /**
531  * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters
532  *
533  * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association
534  * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS.
535  *
536  * @addr: (link) address used locally
537  * @link_id: link ID, or 0 for non-MLO
538  * @htc_trig_based_pkt_ext: default PE in 4us units, if BSS supports HE
539  * @uora_exists: is the UORA element advertised by AP
540  * @ack_enabled: indicates support to receive a multi-TID that solicits either
541  *	ACK, BACK or both
542  * @uora_ocw_range: UORA element's OCW Range field
543  * @frame_time_rts_th: HE duration RTS threshold, in units of 32us
544  * @he_support: does this BSS support HE
545  * @twt_requester: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed
546  *	mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role)
547  * @twt_responder: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed
548  *	mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role)
549  * @twt_protected: does this BSS support protected TWT frames
550  * @twt_broadcast: does this BSS support broadcast TWT
551  * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection
552  * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble
553  * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP)
554  * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing,
555  *	valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified
556  *	with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then.
557  * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old
558  *	as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the
559  *	HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can
560  *	only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after
561  *	association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the
562  *	%BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
563  * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf,
564  *	the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation
565  *	(see @sync_tsf). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
566  * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY
567  *	is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts.
568  *	IMPORTANT: These three sync_* parameters would possibly be out of sync
569  *	by the time the driver will use them. The synchronized view is currently
570  *	guaranteed only in certain callbacks.
571  *	Note also that this is not used with MLD associations, mac80211 doesn't
572  *	know how to track beacons for all of the links for this.
573  * @beacon_int: beacon interval
574  * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp
575  * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an
576  *	index into the rate table configured by the driver in
577  *	the current band.
578  * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate
579  * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled)
580  * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS
581  * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not
582  * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be
583  *	configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example.
584  * @mu_group: VHT MU-MIMO group membership data
585  * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation.
586  *	This field is only valid when the channel is a wide HT/VHT channel.
587  *	Note that with TDLS this can be the case (channel is HT, protection must
588  *	be used from this field) even when the BSS association isn't using HT.
589  * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value
590  *	implies disabled. As with the cfg80211 callback, a change here should
591  *	cause an event to be sent indicating where the current value is in
592  *	relation to the newly configured threshold.
593  * @cqm_rssi_low: Connection quality monitor RSSI lower threshold, a zero value
594  *	implies disabled.  This is an alternative mechanism to the single
595  *	threshold event and can't be enabled simultaneously with it.
596  * @cqm_rssi_high: Connection quality monitor RSSI upper threshold.
597  * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis
598  * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS.
599  * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode.
600  * @txpower: TX power in dBm.  INT_MIN means not configured.
601  * @txpower_type: TX power adjustment used to control per packet Transmit
602  *	Power Control (TPC) in lower driver for the current vif. In particular
603  *	TPC is enabled if value passed in %txpower_type is
604  *	NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED (allow using less than specified from
605  *	userspace), whereas TPC is disabled if %txpower_type is set to
606  *	NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED (use value configured from userspace)
607  * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave
608  * @allow_p2p_go_ps: indication for AP or P2P GO interface, whether it's allowed
609  *	to use P2P PS mechanism or not. AP/P2P GO is not allowed to use P2P PS
610  *	if it has associated clients without P2P PS support.
611  * @max_idle_period: the time period during which the station can refrain from
612  *	transmitting frames to its associated AP without being disassociated.
613  *	In units of 1000 TUs. Zero value indicates that the AP did not include
614  *	a (valid) BSS Max Idle Period Element.
615  * @protected_keep_alive: if set, indicates that the station should send an RSN
616  *	protected frame to the AP to reset the idle timer at the AP for the
617  *	station.
618  * @ftm_responder: whether to enable or disable fine timing measurement FTM
619  *	responder functionality.
620  * @ftmr_params: configurable lci/civic parameter when enabling FTM responder.
621  * @nontransmitted: this BSS is a nontransmitted BSS profile
622  * @transmitter_bssid: the address of transmitter AP
623  * @bssid_index: index inside the multiple BSSID set
624  * @bssid_indicator: 2^bssid_indicator is the maximum number of APs in set
625  * @ema_ap: AP supports enhancements of discovery and advertisement of
626  *	nontransmitted BSSIDs
627  * @profile_periodicity: the least number of beacon frames need to be received
628  *	in order to discover all the nontransmitted BSSIDs in the set.
629  * @he_oper: HE operation information of the BSS (AP/Mesh) or of the AP we are
630  *	connected to (STA)
631  * @he_obss_pd: OBSS Packet Detection parameters.
632  * @he_bss_color: BSS coloring settings, if BSS supports HE
633  * @fils_discovery: FILS discovery configuration
634  * @unsol_bcast_probe_resp_interval: Unsolicited broadcast probe response
635  *	interval.
636  * @beacon_tx_rate: The configured beacon transmit rate that needs to be passed
637  *	to driver when rate control is offloaded to firmware.
638  * @power_type: power type of BSS for 6 GHz
639  * @tx_pwr_env: transmit power envelope array of BSS.
640  * @tx_pwr_env_num: number of @tx_pwr_env.
641  * @pwr_reduction: power constraint of BSS.
642  * @eht_support: does this BSS support EHT
643  * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. Internally it is
644  *	write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine
645  *	for read access.
646  * @mu_mimo_owner: indicates interface owns MU-MIMO capability
647  * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL
648  *	when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX
649  *	path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always
650  *	be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be
651  *	processed after it switches back to %NULL.
652  * @color_change_active: marks whether a color change is ongoing. Internally it is
653  *	write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine
654  *	for read access.
655  * @color_change_color: the bss color that will be used after the change.
656  */
657 struct ieee80211_bss_conf {
658 	const u8 *bssid;
659 	unsigned int link_id;
660 	u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2);
661 	u8 htc_trig_based_pkt_ext;
662 	bool uora_exists;
663 	u8 uora_ocw_range;
664 	u16 frame_time_rts_th;
665 	bool he_support;
666 	bool twt_requester;
667 	bool twt_responder;
668 	bool twt_protected;
669 	bool twt_broadcast;
670 	/* erp related data */
671 	bool use_cts_prot;
672 	bool use_short_preamble;
673 	bool use_short_slot;
674 	bool enable_beacon;
675 	u8 dtim_period;
676 	u16 beacon_int;
677 	u16 assoc_capability;
678 	u64 sync_tsf;
679 	u32 sync_device_ts;
680 	u8 sync_dtim_count;
681 	u32 basic_rates;
682 	struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate;
683 	int mcast_rate[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
684 	u16 ht_operation_mode;
685 	s32 cqm_rssi_thold;
686 	u32 cqm_rssi_hyst;
687 	s32 cqm_rssi_low;
688 	s32 cqm_rssi_high;
689 	struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
690 	struct ieee80211_mu_group_data mu_group;
691 	bool qos;
692 	bool hidden_ssid;
693 	int txpower;
694 	enum nl80211_tx_power_setting txpower_type;
695 	struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr;
696 	bool allow_p2p_go_ps;
697 	u16 max_idle_period;
698 	bool protected_keep_alive;
699 	bool ftm_responder;
700 	struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params *ftmr_params;
701 	/* Multiple BSSID data */
702 	bool nontransmitted;
703 	u8 transmitter_bssid[ETH_ALEN];
704 	u8 bssid_index;
705 	u8 bssid_indicator;
706 	bool ema_ap;
707 	u8 profile_periodicity;
708 	struct {
709 		u32 params;
710 		u16 nss_set;
711 	} he_oper;
712 	struct ieee80211_he_obss_pd he_obss_pd;
713 	struct cfg80211_he_bss_color he_bss_color;
714 	struct ieee80211_fils_discovery fils_discovery;
715 	u32 unsol_bcast_probe_resp_interval;
716 	struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask beacon_tx_rate;
717 	enum ieee80211_ap_reg_power power_type;
718 	struct ieee80211_tx_pwr_env tx_pwr_env[IEEE80211_TPE_MAX_IE_COUNT];
719 	u8 tx_pwr_env_num;
720 	u8 pwr_reduction;
721 	bool eht_support;
722 
723 	bool csa_active;
724 	bool mu_mimo_owner;
725 	struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf;
726 
727 	bool color_change_active;
728 	u8 color_change_color;
729 
730 	ANDROID_KABI_RESERVE(1);
731 };
732 
733 /**
734  * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status
735  *
736  * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info.
737  *
738  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame.
739  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence
740  *	number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment
741  *	number and increasing the sequence number only when the
742  *	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly
743  *	assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly
744  *	for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from
745  *	that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing.
746  *	If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to
747  *	assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE
748  *	802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for
749  *	beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field.
750  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack
751  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination
752  *	station
753  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame
754  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon
755  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU
756  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211.
757  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted
758  *	because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to
759  *	avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or
760  *	firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station
761  *	went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on
762  *	the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for
763  *	that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above),
764  *	since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the
765  *	hardware queue.
766  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged
767  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status
768  * 	is for the whole aggregation.
769  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned,
770  * 	so consider using block ack request (BAR).
771  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be
772  *	set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will
773  *	be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment)
774  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate
775  *	that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for
776  *	off-channel operation.
777  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP: This frame uses hardware encapsulation
778  *	(header conversion)
779  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211,
780  *	used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS
781  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211,
782  *	used to indicate frame should not be encrypted
783  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll
784  *	frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must
785  *	be sent although the station is in powersave mode.
786  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the
787  *	transmit function after the current frame, this can be used
788  *	by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the
789  *	queue gets full.
790  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted
791  *	after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not
792  *	be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.)
793  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME
794  *	code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status
795  *	should kick the MLME state machine.
796  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211
797  *	MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX
798  *	status to user space)
799  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame
800  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this
801  *	frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use.
802  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on
803  *	the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done
804  *	in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be
805  *	handled properly by the device.
806  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP
807  *	testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow
808  *	TKIP countermeasures to be tested.
809  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate.
810  *	This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P
811  *	frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band.
812  * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period,
813  *	when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in
814  *	an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames
815  *	the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for
816  *	PS-Poll responses.
817  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate.
818  *	This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when
819  *	the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose.
820  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it
821  *	would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for
822  *	monitor injection).
823  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED: A frame that was marked with
824  *	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK has been successfully transmitted without
825  *	any errors (like issues specific to the driver/HW).
826  *	This flag must not be set for frames that don't request no-ack
827  *	behaviour with IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK.
828  *
829  * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't
830  *	 forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary.
831  */
832 enum mac80211_tx_info_flags {
833 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS		= BIT(0),
834 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ		= BIT(1),
835 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK			= BIT(2),
836 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT		= BIT(3),
837 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT		= BIT(4),
838 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM	= BIT(5),
839 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU			= BIT(6),
840 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED		= BIT(7),
841 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED		= BIT(8),
842 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK			= BIT(9),
843 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU			= BIT(10),
844 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK		= BIT(11),
845 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE	= BIT(12),
846 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK	= BIT(13),
847 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP		= BIT(14),
848 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED		= BIT(15),
849 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT		= BIT(16),
850 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER		= BIT(17),
851 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES		= BIT(18),
852 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION	= BIT(19),
853 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX		= BIT(20),
854 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX	= BIT(21),
855 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC			= BIT(22),
856 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC			= BIT(23) | BIT(24),
857 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN		= BIT(25),
858 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE	= BIT(26),
859 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE		= BIT(27),
860 	IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP		= BIT(28),
861 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE		= BIT(29),
862 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG		= BIT(30),
863 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED	= BIT(31),
864 };
865 
866 #define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT		23
867 
868 #define IEEE80211_TX_RC_S1G_MCS IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS
869 
870 /**
871  * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control
872  *
873  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control
874  *	protocol frame (e.g. EAP)
875  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll
876  *	frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD).
877  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT: This frame is injected with rate information
878  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU: This frame is an A-MSDU frame
879  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT: This frame is going through the fast_xmit path
880  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP: This frame skips mesh path lookup
881  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTCFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211,
882  *	used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before
883  *	it can be sent out.
884  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_NO_SEQNO: Do not overwrite the sequence number that
885  *	has already been assigned to this frame.
886  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_DONT_REORDER: This frame should not be reordered
887  *	relative to other frames that have this flag set, independent
888  *	of their QoS TID or other priority field values.
889  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MCAST_MLO_FIRST_TX: first MLO TX, used mostly internally
890  *	for sequence number assignment
891  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MLO_LINK: If not @IEEE80211_LINK_UNSPECIFIED, this
892  *	frame should be transmitted on the specific link. This really is
893  *	only relevant for frames that do not have data present, and is
894  *	also not used for 802.3 format frames. Note that even if the frame
895  *	is on a specific link, address translation might still apply if
896  *	it's intended for an MLD.
897  *
898  * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags.
899  */
900 enum mac80211_tx_control_flags {
901 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO	= BIT(0),
902 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE		= BIT(1),
903 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT		= BIT(2),
904 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU			= BIT(3),
905 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT		= BIT(4),
906 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP	= BIT(5),
907 	IEEE80211_TX_INTCFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING	= BIT(6),
908 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_NO_SEQNO		= BIT(7),
909 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_DONT_REORDER		= BIT(8),
910 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MCAST_MLO_FIRST_TX	= BIT(9),
911 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MLO_LINK		= 0xf0000000,
912 };
913 
914 #define IEEE80211_LINK_UNSPECIFIED	0xf
915 #define IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MLO_LINK_UNSPEC	\
916 	u32_encode_bits(IEEE80211_LINK_UNSPECIFIED, \
917 			IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MLO_LINK)
918 
919 /**
920  * enum mac80211_tx_status_flags - flags to describe transmit status
921  *
922  * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_ACK_SIGNAL_VALID: ACK signal is valid
923  *
924  * These flags are used in tx_info->status.flags.
925  */
926 enum mac80211_tx_status_flags {
927 	IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_ACK_SIGNAL_VALID = BIT(0),
928 };
929 
930 /*
931  * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are
932  * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack.
933  */
934 #define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK |		      \
935 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT |    \
936 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU |	      \
937 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED |	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK |		      \
938 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK |	      \
939 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER |    \
940 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC |		      \
941 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
942 
943 /**
944  * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the
945  *	Rate Control algorithm.
946  *
947  * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx,
948  * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate.
949  *
950  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate.
951  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required.
952  *	This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection.
953  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble.
954  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate.
955  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split
956  *	into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number)
957  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in
958  *	Greenfield mode.
959  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz.
960  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission
961  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission
962  *	(80+80 isn't supported yet)
963  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the
964  *	adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is
965  *	NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS.
966  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate.
967  */
968 enum mac80211_rate_control_flags {
969 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS		= BIT(0),
970 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT		= BIT(1),
971 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE	= BIT(2),
972 
973 	/* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */
974 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS			= BIT(3),
975 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD		= BIT(4),
976 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH		= BIT(5),
977 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA		= BIT(6),
978 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI		= BIT(7),
979 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS			= BIT(8),
980 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH		= BIT(9),
981 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH		= BIT(10),
982 };
983 
984 
985 /* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */
986 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40
987 
988 /* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */
989 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24
990 
991 /* maximum number of rate stages */
992 #define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES	4
993 
994 /* maximum number of rate table entries */
995 #define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE	4
996 
997 /**
998  * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status
999  *
1000  * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with
1001  * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags)
1002  * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate
1003  *
1004  * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used
1005  * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried.
1006  *
1007  * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should
1008  * always report the rate along with the flags it used.
1009  *
1010  * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs
1011  * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate
1012  * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example,
1013  * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the
1014  * information::
1015  *
1016  *    { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 }
1017  *
1018  * then this means that the frame should be transmitted
1019  * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four
1020  * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets
1021  * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status
1022  * information should then contain::
1023  *
1024  *   { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ...
1025  *
1026  * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2
1027  * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement.
1028  */
1029 struct ieee80211_tx_rate {
1030 	s8 idx;
1031 	u16 count:5,
1032 	    flags:11;
1033 } __packed;
1034 
1035 #define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY		31
1036 
ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate * rate,u8 mcs,u8 nss)1037 static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate,
1038 					  u8 mcs, u8 nss)
1039 {
1040 	WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF);
1041 	WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7);
1042 	rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs;
1043 }
1044 
1045 static inline u8
ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate * rate)1046 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
1047 {
1048 	return rate->idx & 0xF;
1049 }
1050 
1051 static inline u8
ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate * rate)1052 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
1053 {
1054 	return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1;
1055 }
1056 
1057 /**
1058  * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information
1059  *
1060  * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses:
1061  *  (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do
1062  *  (2) driver internal use (if applicable)
1063  *  (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened
1064  *
1065  * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above
1066  * @band: the band to transmit on (use e.g. for checking for races),
1067  *	not valid if the interface is an MLD since we won't know which
1068  *	link the frame will be transmitted on
1069  * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC
1070  * @ack_frame_id: internal frame ID for TX status, used internally
1071  * @tx_time_est: TX time estimate in units of 4us, used internally
1072  * @control: union part for control data
1073  * @control.rates: TX rates array to try
1074  * @control.rts_cts_rate_idx: rate for RTS or CTS
1075  * @control.use_rts: use RTS
1076  * @control.use_cts_prot: use RTS/CTS
1077  * @control.short_preamble: use short preamble (CCK only)
1078  * @control.skip_table: skip externally configured rate table
1079  * @control.jiffies: timestamp for expiry on powersave clients
1080  * @control.vif: virtual interface (may be NULL)
1081  * @control.hw_key: key to encrypt with (may be NULL)
1082  * @control.flags: control flags, see &enum mac80211_tx_control_flags
1083  * @control.enqueue_time: enqueue time (for iTXQs)
1084  * @driver_rates: alias to @control.rates to reserve space
1085  * @pad: padding
1086  * @rate_driver_data: driver use area if driver needs @control.rates
1087  * @status: union part for status data
1088  * @status.rates: attempted rates
1089  * @status.ack_signal: ACK signal
1090  * @status.ampdu_ack_len: AMPDU ack length
1091  * @status.ampdu_len: AMPDU length
1092  * @status.antenna: (legacy, kept only for iwlegacy)
1093  * @status.tx_time: airtime consumed for transmission; note this is only
1094  *	used for WMM AC, not for airtime fairness
1095  * @status.flags: status flags, see &enum mac80211_tx_status_flags
1096  * @status.status_driver_data: driver use area
1097  * @ack: union part for pure ACK data
1098  * @ack.cookie: cookie for the ACK
1099  * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers
1100  * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames.
1101  * 	relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
1102  * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames.
1103  * 	relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
1104  * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame
1105  */
1106 struct ieee80211_tx_info {
1107 	/* common information */
1108 	u32 flags;
1109 	u32 band:3,
1110 	    ack_frame_id:13,
1111 	    hw_queue:4,
1112 	    tx_time_est:10;
1113 	/* 2 free bits */
1114 
1115 	union {
1116 		struct {
1117 			union {
1118 				/* rate control */
1119 				struct {
1120 					struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[
1121 						IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1122 					s8 rts_cts_rate_idx;
1123 					u8 use_rts:1;
1124 					u8 use_cts_prot:1;
1125 					u8 short_preamble:1;
1126 					u8 skip_table:1;
1127 					/* 2 bytes free */
1128 				};
1129 				/* only needed before rate control */
1130 				unsigned long jiffies;
1131 			};
1132 			/* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */
1133 			struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
1134 			struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key;
1135 			u32 flags;
1136 			codel_time_t enqueue_time;
1137 		} control;
1138 		struct {
1139 			u64 cookie;
1140 		} ack;
1141 		struct {
1142 			struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1143 			s32 ack_signal;
1144 			u8 ampdu_ack_len;
1145 			u8 ampdu_len;
1146 			u8 antenna;
1147 			u8 pad;
1148 			u16 tx_time;
1149 			u8 flags;
1150 			u8 pad2;
1151 			void *status_driver_data[16 / sizeof(void *)];
1152 		} status;
1153 		struct {
1154 			struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[
1155 				IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1156 			u8 pad[4];
1157 
1158 			void *rate_driver_data[
1159 				IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
1160 		};
1161 
1162 		ANDROID_KABI_RESERVE(1);
1163 
1164 		void *driver_data[
1165 			IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
1166 	};
1167 };
1168 
1169 static inline u16
ieee80211_info_set_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info * info,u16 tx_time_est)1170 ieee80211_info_set_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info, u16 tx_time_est)
1171 {
1172 	/* We only have 10 bits in tx_time_est, so store airtime
1173 	 * in increments of 4us and clamp the maximum to 2**12-1
1174 	 */
1175 	info->tx_time_est = min_t(u16, tx_time_est, 4095) >> 2;
1176 	return info->tx_time_est << 2;
1177 }
1178 
1179 static inline u16
ieee80211_info_get_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info * info)1180 ieee80211_info_get_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
1181 {
1182 	return info->tx_time_est << 2;
1183 }
1184 
1185 /***
1186  * struct ieee80211_rate_status - mrr stage for status path
1187  *
1188  * This struct is used in struct ieee80211_tx_status to provide drivers a
1189  * dynamic way to report about used rates and power levels per packet.
1190  *
1191  * @rate_idx The actual used rate.
1192  * @try_count How often the rate was tried.
1193  * @tx_power_idx An idx into the ieee80211_hw->tx_power_levels list of the
1194  * 	corresponding wifi hardware. The idx shall point to the power level
1195  * 	that was used when sending the packet.
1196  */
1197 struct ieee80211_rate_status {
1198 	struct rate_info rate_idx;
1199 	u8 try_count;
1200 	u8 tx_power_idx;
1201 };
1202 
1203 /**
1204  * struct ieee80211_tx_status - extended tx status info for rate control
1205  *
1206  * @sta: Station that the packet was transmitted for
1207  * @info: Basic tx status information
1208  * @skb: Packet skb (can be NULL if not provided by the driver)
1209  * @rates: Mrr stages that were used when sending the packet
1210  * @n_rates: Number of mrr stages (count of instances for @rates)
1211  * @free_list: list where processed skbs are stored to be free'd by the driver
1212  * @ack_hwtstamp: Hardware timestamp of the received ack in nanoseconds
1213  *	Only needed for Timing measurement and Fine timing measurement action
1214  *	frames. Only reported by devices that have timestamping enabled.
1215  */
1216 struct ieee80211_tx_status {
1217 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1218 	struct ieee80211_tx_info *info;
1219 	struct sk_buff *skb;
1220 	struct ieee80211_rate_status *rates;
1221 	ktime_t ack_hwtstamp;
1222 	u8 n_rates;
1223 
1224 	struct list_head *free_list;
1225 };
1226 
1227 /**
1228  * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs
1229  *
1230  * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan
1231  * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace
1232  * and the ones generated by mac80211.
1233  *
1234  * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs.
1235  * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs.
1236  * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones)
1237  * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies
1238  */
1239 struct ieee80211_scan_ies {
1240 	const u8 *ies[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1241 	size_t len[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1242 	const u8 *common_ies;
1243 	size_t common_ie_len;
1244 };
1245 
1246 
IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff * skb)1247 static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb)
1248 {
1249 	return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb;
1250 }
1251 
IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff * skb)1252 static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb)
1253 {
1254 	return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb;
1255 }
1256 
1257 /**
1258  * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status
1259  *
1260  * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared.
1261  *
1262  * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report
1263  * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything
1264  * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear
1265  * the count since you need to fill that in anyway).
1266  *
1267  * NOTE: While the rates array is kept intact, this will wipe all of the
1268  *	 driver_data fields in info, so it's up to the driver to restore
1269  *	 any fields it needs after calling this helper.
1270  */
1271 static inline void
ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info * info)1272 ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
1273 {
1274 	int i;
1275 
1276 	BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1277 		     offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates));
1278 	BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1279 		     offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates));
1280 	BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8);
1281 	/* clear the rate counts */
1282 	for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++)
1283 		info->status.rates[i].count = 0;
1284 	memset_after(&info->status, 0, rates);
1285 }
1286 
1287 
1288 /**
1289  * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags
1290  *
1291  * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
1292  * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame.
1293  *	Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED.
1294  * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware.
1295  * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame,
1296  *	verification has been done by the hardware.
1297  * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV and ICV are stripped from this frame.
1298  *	If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection
1299  *	hence the driver or hardware will have to do that.
1300  * @RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED: Currently only valid for CCMP/GCMP frames, this
1301  *	flag indicates that the PN was verified for replay protection.
1302  *	Note that this flag is also currently only supported when a frame
1303  *	is also decrypted (ie. @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED must be set)
1304  * @RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED: The driver should set this flag if it did
1305  *	de-duplication by itself.
1306  * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on
1307  *	the frame.
1308  * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on
1309  *	the frame.
1310  * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1311  *	field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU
1312  *	was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS
1313  *	merging.
1314  * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1315  *	field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU
1316  *	(including FCS) was received.
1317  * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1318  *	field) is valid and contains the time the SYNC preamble was received.
1319  * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present.
1320  *	Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU)
1321  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference
1322  *	number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for
1323  *	each A-MPDU
1324  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all
1325  *	subframes of a single A-MPDU
1326  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU
1327  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected
1328  *	on this subframe
1329  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC
1330  *	is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field)
1331  * @RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED: The mic was stripped of this packet. Decryption was
1332  *	done by the hardware
1333  * @RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR: Report frame only to monitor interfaces without
1334  *	processing it in any regular way.
1335  *	This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1336  *	them for sniffing purposes.
1337  * @RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR: Process and report frame to all interfaces except
1338  *	monitor interfaces.
1339  *	This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1340  *	them for sniffing purposes.
1341  * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU
1342  *	subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons.
1343  *	All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g.
1344  *	if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while
1345  *	the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to
1346  *	deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU
1347  *	subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be
1348  *	either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be
1349  *	interleaved with other frames.
1350  * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA: This frame contains vendor-specific
1351  *	radiotap data in the skb->data (before the frame) as described by
1352  *	the &struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap.
1353  * @RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN: Allow the same PN as same packet before.
1354  *	This is used for AMSDU subframes which can have the same PN as
1355  *	the first subframe.
1356  * @RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED: The ICV is stripped from this frame. CRC checking must
1357  *	be done in the hardware.
1358  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT: Value of the EOF bit in the A-MPDU delimiter for this
1359  *	frame
1360  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN: The EOF value is known
1361  * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE: HE radiotap data is present
1362  *	(&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he, mac80211 will fill in
1363  *
1364  *	 - DATA3_DATA_MCS
1365  *	 - DATA3_DATA_DCM
1366  *	 - DATA3_CODING
1367  *	 - DATA5_GI
1368  *	 - DATA5_DATA_BW_RU_ALLOC
1369  *	 - DATA6_NSTS
1370  *	 - DATA3_STBC
1371  *
1372  *	from the RX info data, so leave those zeroed when building this data)
1373  * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU: HE MU radiotap data is present
1374  *	(&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he_mu)
1375  * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG: L-SIG radiotap data is present
1376  * @RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU: use the frame only for radiotap reporting, with
1377  *	the "0-length PSDU" field included there.  The value for it is
1378  *	in &struct ieee80211_rx_status.  Note that if this value isn't
1379  *	known the frame shouldn't be reported.
1380  * @RX_FLAG_8023: the frame has an 802.3 header (decap offload performed by
1381  *	hardware or driver)
1382  */
1383 enum mac80211_rx_flags {
1384 	RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR		= BIT(0),
1385 	RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED		= BIT(1),
1386 	RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START	= BIT(2),
1387 	RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED		= BIT(3),
1388 	RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED		= BIT(4),
1389 	RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC		= BIT(5),
1390 	RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC 	= BIT(6),
1391 	RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START		= BIT(7),
1392 	RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL		= BIT(8),
1393 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS		= BIT(9),
1394 	RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED		= BIT(10),
1395 	RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED		= BIT(11),
1396 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN	= BIT(12),
1397 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST		= BIT(13),
1398 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR	= BIT(14),
1399 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN	= BIT(15),
1400 	RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END		= BIT(16),
1401 	RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR		= BIT(17),
1402 	RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR		= BIT(18),
1403 	RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE		= BIT(19),
1404 	RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA	= BIT(20),
1405 	RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED		= BIT(21),
1406 	RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN		= BIT(22),
1407 	RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED		= BIT(23),
1408 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT		= BIT(24),
1409 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN	= BIT(25),
1410 	RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE		= BIT(26),
1411 	RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU		= BIT(27),
1412 	RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG		= BIT(28),
1413 	RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU			= BIT(29),
1414 	RX_FLAG_8023			= BIT(30),
1415 };
1416 
1417 /**
1418  * enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags - MCS & bandwidth flags
1419  *
1420  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame
1421  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used
1422  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission,
1423  *	if the driver fills this value it should add
1424  *	%IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT
1425  *	to @hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact.
1426  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used
1427  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3
1428  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed
1429  */
1430 enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags {
1431 	RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE		= BIT(0),
1432 	RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI		= BIT(2),
1433 	RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF		= BIT(3),
1434 	RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK		= BIT(4) | BIT(5),
1435 	RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC		= BIT(6),
1436 	RX_ENC_FLAG_BF			= BIT(7),
1437 };
1438 
1439 #define RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT		4
1440 
1441 enum mac80211_rx_encoding {
1442 	RX_ENC_LEGACY = 0,
1443 	RX_ENC_HT,
1444 	RX_ENC_VHT,
1445 	RX_ENC_HE,
1446 };
1447 
1448 /**
1449  * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status
1450  *
1451  * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset
1452  * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received
1453  * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb).
1454  *
1455  * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function
1456  * 	(TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware.
1457  * @boottime_ns: CLOCK_BOOTTIME timestamp the frame was received at, this is
1458  *	needed only for beacons and probe responses that update the scan cache.
1459  * @ack_tx_hwtstamp: Hardware timestamp for the ack TX in nanoseconds. Only
1460  *	needed for Timing measurement and Fine timing measurement action frames.
1461  *	Only reported by devices that have timestamping enabled.
1462  * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use
1463  *	it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation
1464  * @band: the active band when this frame was received
1465  * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz
1466  *	This field must be set for management frames, but isn't strictly needed
1467  *	for data (other) frames - for those it only affects radiotap reporting.
1468  * @freq_offset: @freq has a positive offset of 500Khz.
1469  * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or
1470  *	unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags
1471  *	@IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_*
1472  * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength
1473  *	values were filled.
1474  * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't
1475  *	support dB or unspecified units)
1476  * @antenna: antenna used
1477  * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if
1478  *	HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT)
1479  * @nss: number of streams (VHT and HE only)
1480  * @flag: %RX_FLAG_\*
1481  * @encoding: &enum mac80211_rx_encoding
1482  * @bw: &enum rate_info_bw
1483  * @enc_flags: uses bits from &enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags
1484  * @he_ru: HE RU, from &enum nl80211_he_ru_alloc
1485  * @he_gi: HE GI, from &enum nl80211_he_gi
1486  * @he_dcm: HE DCM value
1487  * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211
1488  * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for
1489  *	each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU
1490  * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC
1491  * @zero_length_psdu_type: radiotap type of the 0-length PSDU
1492  * @link_valid: if the link which is identified by @link_id is valid. This flag
1493  *	is set only when connection is MLO.
1494  * @link_id: id of the link used to receive the packet. This is used along with
1495  *	@link_valid.
1496  */
1497 struct ieee80211_rx_status {
1498 	u64 mactime;
1499 	union {
1500 		u64 boottime_ns;
1501 		ktime_t ack_tx_hwtstamp;
1502 	};
1503 	u32 device_timestamp;
1504 	u32 ampdu_reference;
1505 	u32 flag;
1506 	u16 freq: 13, freq_offset: 1;
1507 	u8 enc_flags;
1508 	u8 encoding:2, bw:3, he_ru:3;
1509 	u8 he_gi:2, he_dcm:1;
1510 	u8 rate_idx;
1511 	u8 nss;
1512 	u8 rx_flags;
1513 	u8 band;
1514 	u8 antenna;
1515 	s8 signal;
1516 	u8 chains;
1517 	s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS];
1518 	u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc;
1519 	u8 zero_length_psdu_type;
1520 	u8 link_valid:1, link_id:4;
1521 };
1522 
1523 static inline u32
ieee80211_rx_status_to_khz(struct ieee80211_rx_status * rx_status)1524 ieee80211_rx_status_to_khz(struct ieee80211_rx_status *rx_status)
1525 {
1526 	return MHZ_TO_KHZ(rx_status->freq) +
1527 	       (rx_status->freq_offset ? 500 : 0);
1528 }
1529 
1530 /**
1531  * struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap - vendor radiotap data information
1532  * @present: presence bitmap for this vendor namespace
1533  *	(this could be extended in the future if any vendor needs more
1534  *	 bits, the radiotap spec does allow for that)
1535  * @align: radiotap vendor namespace alignment. This defines the needed
1536  *	alignment for the @data field below, not for the vendor namespace
1537  *	description itself (which has a fixed 2-byte alignment)
1538  *	Must be a power of two, and be set to at least 1!
1539  * @oui: radiotap vendor namespace OUI
1540  * @subns: radiotap vendor sub namespace
1541  * @len: radiotap vendor sub namespace skip length, if alignment is done
1542  *	then that's added to this, i.e. this is only the length of the
1543  *	@data field.
1544  * @pad: number of bytes of padding after the @data, this exists so that
1545  *	the skb data alignment can be preserved even if the data has odd
1546  *	length
1547  * @data: the actual vendor namespace data
1548  *
1549  * This struct, including the vendor data, goes into the skb->data before
1550  * the 802.11 header. It's split up in mac80211 using the align/oui/subns
1551  * data.
1552  */
1553 struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap {
1554 	u32 present;
1555 	u8 align;
1556 	u8 oui[3];
1557 	u8 subns;
1558 	u8 pad;
1559 	u16 len;
1560 	u8 data[];
1561 } __packed;
1562 
1563 /**
1564  * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags
1565  *
1566  * Flags to define PHY configuration options
1567  *
1568  * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this
1569  *	to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets
1570  *	or not, do not use instead of filter flags!
1571  * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only).
1572  *	This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2,
1573  *	meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to
1574  *	transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames.
1575  *	Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states,
1576  *	driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support"
1577  *	for more.
1578  * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set
1579  *	the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but
1580  *	may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will
1581  *	be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but
1582  *	it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active.
1583  * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main
1584  *	operating channel.
1585  */
1586 enum ieee80211_conf_flags {
1587 	IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR		= (1<<0),
1588 	IEEE80211_CONF_PS		= (1<<1),
1589 	IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE		= (1<<2),
1590 	IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL	= (1<<3),
1591 };
1592 
1593 
1594 /**
1595  * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed
1596  *
1597  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed
1598  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed
1599  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed
1600  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed
1601  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed
1602  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed
1603  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed
1604  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed
1605  *	Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1606  *	otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
1607  */
1608 enum ieee80211_conf_changed {
1609 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS		= BIT(1),
1610 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL	= BIT(2),
1611 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR		= BIT(3),
1612 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS		= BIT(4),
1613 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER		= BIT(5),
1614 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL		= BIT(6),
1615 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS	= BIT(7),
1616 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE		= BIT(8),
1617 };
1618 
1619 /**
1620  * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode
1621  *
1622  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic
1623  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off
1624  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static
1625  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic
1626  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use
1627  */
1628 enum ieee80211_smps_mode {
1629 	IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC,
1630 	IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF,
1631 	IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC,
1632 	IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC,
1633 
1634 	/* keep last */
1635 	IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES,
1636 };
1637 
1638 /**
1639  * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device
1640  *
1641  * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware.
1642  *
1643  * @flags: configuration flags defined above
1644  *
1645  * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval
1646  * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use
1647  *	in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon
1648  *	has been received and the DTIM period is known.
1649  * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the
1650  *	powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when
1651  *	the CONF_PS flag is set.
1652  *
1653  * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility
1654  *	value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces
1655  *
1656  * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to
1657  * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled
1658  *
1659  * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame
1660  *	(a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11,
1661  *	but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries
1662  * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short"
1663  *	frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the
1664  *	number of transmissions not the number of retries
1665  *
1666  * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that
1667  *	%IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not
1668  *	configured for an HT channel.
1669  *	Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1670  *	otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
1671  */
1672 struct ieee80211_conf {
1673 	u32 flags;
1674 	int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout;
1675 
1676 	u16 listen_interval;
1677 	u8 ps_dtim_period;
1678 
1679 	u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count;
1680 
1681 	struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
1682 	bool radar_enabled;
1683 	enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
1684 
1685 	ANDROID_KABI_RESERVE(1);
1686 };
1687 
1688 /**
1689  * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data
1690  *
1691  * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch
1692  * operation.
1693  *
1694  * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization
1695  *	Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch
1696  *	announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter
1697  *	the driver passed into mac80211.
1698  * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the
1699  *	rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211.
1700  * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the
1701  *	scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP.
1702  * @chandef: the new channel to switch to
1703  * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event
1704  * @delay: maximum delay between the time the AP transmitted the last beacon in
1705   *	current channel and the expected time of the first beacon in the new
1706   *	channel, expressed in TU.
1707  */
1708 struct ieee80211_channel_switch {
1709 	u64 timestamp;
1710 	u32 device_timestamp;
1711 	bool block_tx;
1712 	struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
1713 	u8 count;
1714 	u32 delay;
1715 };
1716 
1717 /**
1718  * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags
1719  *
1720  * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering
1721  *	on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups
1722  * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality
1723  *	monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor
1724  *	connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and
1725  *	provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached.
1726  * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD: The device can do U-APSD for this
1727  *	interface. This flag should be set during interface addition,
1728  *	but may be set/cleared as late as authentication to an AP. It is
1729  *	only valid for managed/station mode interfaces.
1730  * @IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE: request to handle NOA attributes
1731  *	and send P2P_PS notification to the driver if NOA changed, even
1732  *	this is not pure P2P vif.
1733  */
1734 enum ieee80211_vif_flags {
1735 	IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER		= BIT(0),
1736 	IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI		= BIT(1),
1737 	IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD		= BIT(2),
1738 	IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE		= BIT(3),
1739 };
1740 
1741 
1742 /**
1743  * enum ieee80211_offload_flags - virtual interface offload flags
1744  *
1745  * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_ENABLED: tx encapsulation offload is enabled
1746  *	The driver supports sending frames passed as 802.3 frames by mac80211.
1747  *	It must also support sending 802.11 packets for the same interface.
1748  * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_4ADDR: support 4-address mode encapsulation offload
1749  * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_DECAP_ENABLED: rx encapsulation offload is enabled
1750  *	The driver supports passing received 802.11 frames as 802.3 frames to
1751  *	mac80211.
1752  */
1753 
1754 enum ieee80211_offload_flags {
1755 	IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_ENABLED		= BIT(0),
1756 	IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_4ADDR		= BIT(1),
1757 	IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_DECAP_ENABLED		= BIT(2),
1758 };
1759 
1760 /**
1761  * struct ieee80211_vif_cfg - interface configuration
1762  * @assoc: association status
1763  * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS or not
1764  * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created
1765  * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by
1766  *	offchannel/dynamic_ps operations.
1767  * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true
1768  * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The
1769  *	may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here.
1770  *	The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here
1771  *	to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass.
1772  * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this
1773  *	may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list
1774  *	array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case.
1775  * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode.
1776  * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid.
1777  * @s1g: BSS is S1G BSS (affects Association Request format).
1778  * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the
1779  *	hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what
1780  *	your driver/device needs to do.
1781  * @ap_addr: AP MLD address, or BSSID for non-MLO connections
1782  *	(station mode only)
1783  */
1784 struct ieee80211_vif_cfg {
1785 	/* association related data */
1786 	bool assoc, ibss_joined;
1787 	bool ibss_creator;
1788 	bool ps;
1789 	u16 aid;
1790 
1791 	__be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN];
1792 	int arp_addr_cnt;
1793 	u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN];
1794 	size_t ssid_len;
1795 	bool s1g;
1796 	bool idle;
1797 	u8 ap_addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2);
1798 };
1799 
1800 /**
1801  * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data
1802  *
1803  * Data in this structure is continually present for driver
1804  * use during the life of a virtual interface.
1805  *
1806  * @type: type of this virtual interface
1807  * @cfg: vif configuration, see &struct ieee80211_vif_cfg
1808  * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own
1809  *	or the BSS we're associated to
1810  * @link_conf: in case of MLD, the per-link BSS configuration,
1811  *	indexed by link ID
1812  * @valid_links: bitmap of valid links, or 0 for non-MLO.
1813  * @active_links: The bitmap of active links, or 0 for non-MLO.
1814  *	The driver shouldn't change this directly, but use the
1815  *	API calls meant for that purpose.
1816  * @addr: address of this interface
1817  * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p
1818  *	interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively
1819  * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface,
1820  *	these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added
1821  *	or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed
1822  *	at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field
1823  * @offload_flags: hardware offload capabilities/flags for this interface.
1824  *	These are initialized by mac80211 before calling .add_interface,
1825  *	.change_interface or .update_vif_offload and updated by the driver
1826  *	within these ops, based on supported features or runtime change
1827  *	restrictions.
1828  * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC
1829  * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only
1830  * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per
1831  *	interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual
1832  *	monitor interface (if that is requested.)
1833  * @probe_req_reg: probe requests should be reported to mac80211 for this
1834  *	interface.
1835  * @rx_mcast_action_reg: multicast Action frames should be reported to mac80211
1836  *	for this interface.
1837  * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1838  *	sizeof(void \*).
1839  * @txq: the multicast data TX queue (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction)
1840  * @offload_flags: 802.3 -> 802.11 enapsulation offload flags, see
1841  *	&enum ieee80211_offload_flags.
1842  * @mbssid_tx_vif: Pointer to the transmitting interface if MBSSID is enabled.
1843  */
1844 struct ieee80211_vif {
1845 	enum nl80211_iftype type;
1846 	struct ieee80211_vif_cfg cfg;
1847 	struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf;
1848 	struct ieee80211_bss_conf __rcu *link_conf[IEEE80211_MLD_MAX_NUM_LINKS];
1849 	u16 valid_links, active_links;
1850 	u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2);
1851 	bool p2p;
1852 
1853 	u8 cab_queue;
1854 	u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1855 
1856 	struct ieee80211_txq *txq;
1857 
1858 	u32 driver_flags;
1859 	u32 offload_flags;
1860 
1861 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
1862 	struct dentry *debugfs_dir;
1863 #endif
1864 
1865 	bool probe_req_reg;
1866 	bool rx_mcast_action_reg;
1867 
1868 	struct ieee80211_vif *mbssid_tx_vif;
1869 
1870 	ANDROID_KABI_RESERVE(1);
1871 
1872 	/* must be last */
1873 	u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
1874 };
1875 
1876 #define for_each_vif_active_link(vif, link, link_id)				\
1877 	for (link_id = 0; link_id < ARRAY_SIZE((vif)->link_conf); link_id++)	\
1878 		if ((!(vif)->active_links ||					\
1879 		     (vif)->active_links & BIT(link_id)) &&			\
1880 		    (link = rcu_dereference((vif)->link_conf[link_id])))
1881 
ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif * vif)1882 static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
1883 {
1884 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH
1885 	return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT;
1886 #endif
1887 	return false;
1888 }
1889 
1890 /**
1891  * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev
1892  * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for
1893  *
1894  * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1895  * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev.
1896  *
1897  * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1898  * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1899  * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1900  */
1901 struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev);
1902 
1903 /**
1904  * ieee80211_vif_to_wdev - return a wdev struct from a vif
1905  * @vif: the vif to get the wdev for
1906  *
1907  * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1908  * (like the vendor commands) that needs to get the wdev for a vif.
1909  * This can also be useful to get the netdev associated to a vif.
1910  */
1911 struct wireless_dev *ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
1912 
1913 /**
1914  * lockdep_vif_mutex_held - for lockdep checks on link poiners
1915  * @vif: the interface to check
1916  */
lockdep_vif_mutex_held(struct ieee80211_vif * vif)1917 static inline bool lockdep_vif_mutex_held(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
1918 {
1919 	return lockdep_is_held(&ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(vif)->mtx);
1920 }
1921 
1922 #define link_conf_dereference_protected(vif, link_id)		\
1923 	rcu_dereference_protected((vif)->link_conf[link_id],	\
1924 				  lockdep_vif_mutex_held(vif))
1925 
1926 /**
1927  * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags
1928  *
1929  * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver
1930  * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf.
1931  *
1932  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the
1933  *	driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this
1934  *	particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs
1935  *	will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC.
1936  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by
1937  *	the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC
1938  *	generation in software.
1939  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates
1940  *	that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key.
1941  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a
1942  *	CCMP/GCMP key if it requires CCMP/GCMP encryption of management frames
1943  *	(MFP) to be done in software.
1944  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver
1945  *	if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV
1946  *	itself should not be generated. Do not set together with
1947  *	@IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does
1948  *	not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or
1949  *	MIC.
1950  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received
1951  *	management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware
1952  *	crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames
1953  *	properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and
1954  *	fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with
1955  *	RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the
1956  *	%IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW.
1957  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the
1958  *	driver for a CCMP/GCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation
1959  *	only for management frames (MFP).
1960  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM: This flag should be set by the
1961  *	driver for a key to indicate that sufficient tailroom must always
1962  *	be reserved for ICV or MIC, even when HW encryption is enabled.
1963  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver for
1964  *	a TKIP key if it only requires MIC space. Do not set together with
1965  *	@IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC on the same key.
1966  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX: Key needs explicit Tx activation.
1967  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE: This flag should be set by the driver
1968  *	for a AES_CMAC key to indicate that it requires sequence number
1969  *	generation only
1970  */
1971 enum ieee80211_key_flags {
1972 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT	= BIT(0),
1973 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV		= BIT(1),
1974 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC	= BIT(2),
1975 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE		= BIT(3),
1976 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX		= BIT(4),
1977 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE		= BIT(5),
1978 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT		= BIT(6),
1979 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM	= BIT(7),
1980 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE	= BIT(8),
1981 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX		= BIT(9),
1982 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE	= BIT(10),
1983 };
1984 
1985 /**
1986  * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information
1987  *
1988  * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by
1989  * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops.
1990  *
1991  * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver
1992  *	wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be
1993  *	encrypted in hardware.
1994  * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector.
1995  * @tx_pn: PN used for TX keys, may be used by the driver as well if it
1996  *	needs to do software PN assignment by itself (e.g. due to TSO)
1997  * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags.
1998  * @keyidx: the key index (0-3)
1999  * @keylen: key material length
2000  * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte)
2001  * 	data block:
2002  * 	- Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits)
2003  * 	- Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits)
2004  * 	- Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits)
2005  * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type
2006  * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type
2007  * @link_id: the link ID for MLO, or -1 for non-MLO or pairwise keys
2008  */
2009 struct ieee80211_key_conf {
2010 	atomic64_t tx_pn;
2011 	u32 cipher;
2012 	u8 icv_len;
2013 	u8 iv_len;
2014 	u8 hw_key_idx;
2015 	s8 keyidx;
2016 	u16 flags;
2017 	s8 link_id;
2018 	u8 keylen;
2019 	u8 key[];
2020 };
2021 
2022 #define IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN	16
2023 
2024 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV16(pn) ((u16)(pn & 0xffff))
2025 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV32(pn) ((u32)((pn >> 16) & 0xffffffff))
2026 
2027 /**
2028  * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter
2029  *
2030  * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order
2031  * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
2032  *	reverse order than in packet)
2033  * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
2034  *	reverse order than in packet)
2035  * @aes_gmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
2036  *	reverse order than in packet)
2037  * @gcmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
2038  *	reverse order than in packet)
2039  * @hw: data for HW-only (e.g. cipher scheme) keys
2040  */
2041 struct ieee80211_key_seq {
2042 	union {
2043 		struct {
2044 			u32 iv32;
2045 			u16 iv16;
2046 		} tkip;
2047 		struct {
2048 			u8 pn[6];
2049 		} ccmp;
2050 		struct {
2051 			u8 pn[6];
2052 		} aes_cmac;
2053 		struct {
2054 			u8 pn[6];
2055 		} aes_gmac;
2056 		struct {
2057 			u8 pn[6];
2058 		} gcmp;
2059 		struct {
2060 			u8 seq[IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN];
2061 			u8 seq_len;
2062 		} hw;
2063 	};
2064 };
2065 
2066 /**
2067  * enum set_key_cmd - key command
2068  *
2069  * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
2070  * indicates whether a key is being removed or added.
2071  *
2072  * @SET_KEY: a key is set
2073  * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled
2074  */
2075 enum set_key_cmd {
2076 	SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY,
2077 };
2078 
2079 /**
2080  * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state
2081  *
2082  * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all,
2083  *	this is a special state for add/remove transitions
2084  * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state
2085  * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated
2086  * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated
2087  * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X)
2088  */
2089 enum ieee80211_sta_state {
2090 	/* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */
2091 	IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST,
2092 	IEEE80211_STA_NONE,
2093 	IEEE80211_STA_AUTH,
2094 	IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC,
2095 	IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED,
2096 };
2097 
2098 /**
2099  * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth
2100  * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz
2101  * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz
2102  * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz
2103  * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz
2104  *	(including 80+80 MHz)
2105  * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_320: station can receive up to 320 MHz
2106  *
2107  * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized
2108  *	correctly, the values must be sorted.
2109  */
2110 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth {
2111 	IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0,
2112 	IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40,
2113 	IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80,
2114 	IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160,
2115 	IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_320,
2116 };
2117 
2118 /**
2119  * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table
2120  *
2121  * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update
2122  * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default.
2123  *	Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control.
2124  */
2125 struct ieee80211_sta_rates {
2126 	struct rcu_head rcu_head;
2127 	struct {
2128 		s8 idx;
2129 		u8 count;
2130 		u8 count_cts;
2131 		u8 count_rts;
2132 		u16 flags;
2133 	} rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE];
2134 };
2135 
2136 /**
2137  * struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr - station txpower configuration
2138  *
2139  * Used to configure txpower for station.
2140  *
2141  * @power: indicates the tx power, in dBm, to be used when sending data frames
2142  *	to the STA.
2143  * @type: In particular if TPC %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED then tx power
2144  *	will be less than or equal to specified from userspace, whereas if TPC
2145  *	%type is NL80211_TX_POWER_AUTOMATIC then it indicates default tx power.
2146  *	NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED is not a valid configuration option for
2147  *	per peer TPC.
2148  */
2149 struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr {
2150 	s16 power;
2151 	enum nl80211_tx_power_setting type;
2152 };
2153 
2154 /**
2155  * struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates - info that is aggregated from active links
2156  *
2157  * Used for any per-link data that needs to be aggregated and updated in the
2158  * main &struct ieee80211_sta when updated or the active links change.
2159  *
2160  * @max_amsdu_len: indicates the maximal length of an A-MSDU in bytes.
2161  *	This field is always valid for packets with a VHT preamble.
2162  *	For packets with a HT preamble, additional limits apply:
2163  *
2164  *	* If the skb is transmitted as part of a BA agreement, the
2165  *	  A-MSDU maximal size is min(max_amsdu_len, 4065) bytes.
2166  *	* If the skb is not part of a BA agreement, the A-MSDU maximal
2167  *	  size is min(max_amsdu_len, 7935) bytes.
2168  *
2169  * Both additional HT limits must be enforced by the low level
2170  * driver. This is defined by the spec (IEEE 802.11-2012 section
2171  * 8.3.2.2 NOTE 2).
2172  * @max_rc_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes recommended by rate control.
2173  * @max_tid_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes for this TID
2174  */
2175 struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates {
2176 	u16 max_amsdu_len;
2177 
2178 	u16 max_rc_amsdu_len;
2179 	u16 max_tid_amsdu_len[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS];
2180 };
2181 
2182 /**
2183  * struct ieee80211_link_sta - station Link specific info
2184  * All link specific info for a STA link for a non MLD STA(single)
2185  * or a MLD STA(multiple entries) are stored here.
2186  *
2187  * @addr: MAC address of the Link STA. For non-MLO STA this is same as the addr
2188  *	in ieee80211_sta. For MLO Link STA this addr can be same or different
2189  *	from addr in ieee80211_sta (representing MLD STA addr)
2190  * @link_id: the link ID for this link STA (0 for deflink)
2191  * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic)
2192  * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates
2193  * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
2194  * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
2195  * @he_cap: HE capabilities of this STA
2196  * @he_6ghz_capa: on 6 GHz, holds the HE 6 GHz band capabilities
2197  * @eht_cap: EHT capabilities of this STA
2198  * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with
2199  * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the
2200  *	station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode
2201  *	notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after
2202  *	the station moves to associated state.
2203  * @txpwr: the station tx power configuration
2204  *
2205  */
2206 struct ieee80211_link_sta {
2207 	u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
2208 	u8 link_id;
2209 	enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
2210 
2211 	u32 supp_rates[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
2212 	struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap;
2213 	struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap;
2214 	struct ieee80211_sta_he_cap he_cap;
2215 	struct ieee80211_he_6ghz_capa he_6ghz_capa;
2216 	struct ieee80211_sta_eht_cap eht_cap;
2217 
2218 	struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates agg;
2219 
2220 	u8 rx_nss;
2221 	enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth;
2222 	struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr txpwr;
2223 };
2224 
2225 /**
2226  * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry
2227  *
2228  * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly
2229  * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in
2230  * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must
2231  * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly,
2232  * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a
2233  * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it.
2234  * This also represents the MLD STA in case of MLO association
2235  * and holds pointers to various link STA's
2236  *
2237  * @addr: MAC address
2238  * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP
2239  * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximal amount of frames in a single AMPDU
2240  *	that this station is allowed to transmit to us.
2241  *	Can be modified by driver.
2242  * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME (if local devices does,
2243  *	otherwise always false)
2244  * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
2245  *	sizeof(void \*), size is determined in hw information.
2246  * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid
2247  *	if wme is supported. The bits order is like in
2248  *	IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_*.
2249  * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported.
2250  * @rates: rate control selection table
2251  * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer
2252  * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only
2253  *	valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place.
2254  * @mfp: indicates whether the STA uses management frame protection or not.
2255  * @mlo: indicates whether the STA is MLO station.
2256  * @max_amsdu_subframes: indicates the maximal number of MSDUs in a single
2257  *	A-MSDU. Taken from the Extended Capabilities element. 0 means
2258  *	unlimited.
2259  * @cur: currently valid data as aggregated from the active links
2260  *	For non MLO STA it will point to the deflink data. For MLO STA
2261  *	ieee80211_sta_recalc_aggregates() must be called to update it.
2262  * @support_p2p_ps: indicates whether the STA supports P2P PS mechanism or not.
2263  * @txq: per-TID data TX queues (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction); note that
2264  *	the last entry (%IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS) is used for non-data frames
2265  * @deflink: This holds the default link STA information, for non MLO STA all link
2266  *	specific STA information is accessed through @deflink or through
2267  *	link[0] which points to address of @deflink. For MLO Link STA
2268  *	the first added link STA will point to deflink.
2269  * @link: reference to Link Sta entries. For Non MLO STA, except 1st link,
2270  *	i.e link[0] all links would be assigned to NULL by default and
2271  *	would access link information via @deflink or link[0]. For MLO
2272  *	STA, first link STA being added will point its link pointer to
2273  *	@deflink address and remaining would be allocated and the address
2274  *	would be assigned to link[link_id] where link_id is the id assigned
2275  *	by the AP.
2276  * @valid_links: bitmap of valid links, or 0 for non-MLO
2277  */
2278 struct ieee80211_sta {
2279 	u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
2280 	u16 aid;
2281 	u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
2282 	bool wme;
2283 	u8 uapsd_queues;
2284 	u8 max_sp;
2285 	struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates;
2286 	bool tdls;
2287 	bool tdls_initiator;
2288 	bool mfp;
2289 	bool mlo;
2290 	u8 max_amsdu_subframes;
2291 
2292 	struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates *cur;
2293 
2294 	bool support_p2p_ps;
2295 
2296 	struct ieee80211_txq *txq[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS + 1];
2297 
2298 	u16 valid_links;
2299 	struct ieee80211_link_sta deflink;
2300 	struct ieee80211_link_sta __rcu *link[IEEE80211_MLD_MAX_NUM_LINKS];
2301 
2302 	ANDROID_KABI_RESERVE(1);
2303 
2304 	/* must be last */
2305 	u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
2306 };
2307 
2308 #ifdef CONFIG_LOCKDEP
2309 bool lockdep_sta_mutex_held(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
2310 #else
lockdep_sta_mutex_held(struct ieee80211_sta * pubsta)2311 static inline bool lockdep_sta_mutex_held(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta)
2312 {
2313 	return true;
2314 }
2315 #endif
2316 
2317 #define link_sta_dereference_protected(sta, link_id)		\
2318 	rcu_dereference_protected((sta)->link[link_id],		\
2319 				  lockdep_sta_mutex_held(sta))
2320 
2321 #define for_each_sta_active_link(vif, sta, link_sta, link_id)			\
2322 	for (link_id = 0; link_id < ARRAY_SIZE((sta)->link); link_id++)		\
2323 		if ((!(vif)->active_links ||					\
2324 		     (vif)->active_links & BIT(link_id)) &&			\
2325 		    ((link_sta) = link_sta_dereference_protected(sta, link_id)))
2326 
2327 /**
2328  * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command
2329  *
2330  * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
2331  * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition.
2332  *
2333  * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping
2334  * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up
2335  */
2336 enum sta_notify_cmd {
2337 	STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE,
2338 };
2339 
2340 /**
2341  * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data
2342  *
2343  * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and
2344  * 	it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU.
2345  */
2346 struct ieee80211_tx_control {
2347 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2348 };
2349 
2350 /**
2351  * struct ieee80211_txq - Software intermediate tx queue
2352  *
2353  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
2354  * @sta: station table entry, %NULL for per-vif queue
2355  * @tid: the TID for this queue (unused for per-vif queue),
2356  *	%IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS for non-data (if enabled)
2357  * @ac: the AC for this queue
2358  * @drv_priv: driver private area, sized by hw->txq_data_size
2359  *
2360  * The driver can obtain packets from this queue by calling
2361  * ieee80211_tx_dequeue().
2362  */
2363 struct ieee80211_txq {
2364 	struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
2365 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2366 	u8 tid;
2367 	u8 ac;
2368 
2369 	/* must be last */
2370 	u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
2371 };
2372 
2373 /**
2374  * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags
2375  *
2376  * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to
2377  * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning
2378  * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting
2379  * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule,
2380  * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully.
2381  *
2382  * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL:
2383  *	The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be
2384  *	controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm
2385  *	should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace
2386  *	will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control
2387  *	algorithm.
2388  *	Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of
2389  *	callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have
2390  *	the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config
2391  *	@use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot
2392  *	timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for
2393  *	CCK frames.
2394  *
2395  * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS:
2396  *	Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include
2397  *	the FCS at the end.
2398  *
2399  * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING:
2400  *	Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames
2401  *	for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others
2402  *	rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used
2403  *	to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and
2404  *	multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that
2405  *	the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc().
2406  *
2407  * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC:
2408  *	Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We
2409  *	expect values between 0 and @max_signal.
2410  *	If possible please provide dB or dBm instead.
2411  *
2412  * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM:
2413  *	Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from
2414  *	one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized
2415  *	between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set.
2416  *
2417  * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT:
2418  * 	Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h
2419  * 	Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC
2420  *
2421  * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION:
2422  *	Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation.
2423  *
2424  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS:
2425  *	Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep).
2426  *
2427  * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK:
2428  *	Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies
2429  *	stack support for dynamic PS.
2430  *
2431  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS:
2432  *	Hardware has support for dynamic PS.
2433  *
2434  * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE:
2435  *	Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w).
2436  *
2437  * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS:
2438  *	Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to
2439  *	the stack.
2440  *
2441  * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR:
2442  *	The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including
2443  *	periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss.
2444  *
2445  * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC:
2446  *	This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e.
2447  *	dtim_period).
2448  *
2449  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports
2450  *	per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If
2451  *	the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not
2452  *	to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still
2453  *	possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag
2454  *	only in that case.
2455  *
2456  * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device
2457  *	autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When
2458  *	this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected
2459  *	stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames.
2460  *	Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure
2461  *	the PS mode of connected stations.
2462  *
2463  * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session
2464  *	setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in
2465  *	software.
2466  *
2467  * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of
2468  *	a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only
2469  *	active interfaces.
2470  *
2471  * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to
2472  *	be created.  It is expected user-space will create vifs as
2473  *	desired (and thus have them named as desired).
2474  *
2475  * @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL: The driver wants to control which of the
2476  *	crypto algorithms can be done in software - so don't automatically
2477  *	try to fall back to it if hardware crypto fails, but do so only if
2478  *	the driver returns 1. This also forces the driver to advertise its
2479  *	supported cipher suites.
2480  *
2481  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT: The driver/hardware supports fast-xmit,
2482  *	this currently requires only the ability to calculate the duration
2483  *	for frames.
2484  *
2485  * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface
2486  *	queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC)
2487  *	for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue
2488  *	control for more details.
2489  *
2490  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate
2491  *	selection table provided by the rate control algorithm.
2492  *
2493  * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any
2494  *	P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface
2495  *	is supported.
2496  *
2497  * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames
2498  *	only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon.
2499  *
2500  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates
2501  *	and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not
2502  *	using aggregation for such frames.)
2503  *
2504  * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA)
2505  *	for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support
2506  *	is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the
2507  *	CSA frame.
2508  *
2509  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload
2510  *	or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first.
2511  *
2512  * @IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands
2513  *	in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band.
2514  *
2515  * @IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW: The device/driver supports wider bandwidth
2516  *	than then BSS bandwidth for a TDLS link on the base channel.
2517  *
2518  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU: The driver supports receiving A-MSDUs
2519  *	within A-MPDU.
2520  *
2521  * @IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS: The device/driver provides TX status
2522  *	for sent beacons.
2523  *
2524  * @IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR: Hardware (or driver) requires that each
2525  *	station has a unique address, i.e. each station entry can be identified
2526  *	by just its MAC address; this prevents, for example, the same station
2527  *	from connecting to two virtual AP interfaces at the same time.
2528  *
2529  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER: Hardware (or driver) manages the
2530  *	reordering buffer internally, guaranteeing mac80211 receives frames in
2531  *	order and does not need to manage its own reorder buffer or BA session
2532  *	timeout.
2533  *
2534  * @IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS: The device uses RSS and thus requires parallel RX,
2535  *	which implies using per-CPU station statistics.
2536  *
2537  * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU: Hardware (or driver) supports software aggregated
2538  *	A-MSDU frames. Requires software tx queueing and fast-xmit support.
2539  *	When not using minstrel/minstrel_ht rate control, the driver must
2540  *	limit the maximum A-MSDU size based on the current tx rate by setting
2541  *	max_rc_amsdu_len in struct ieee80211_sta.
2542  *
2543  * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST: Hardware (or driver) supports sending frag_list
2544  *	skbs, needed for zero-copy software A-MSDU.
2545  *
2546  * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK: The driver (or firmware) reports low ack event
2547  *	by ieee80211_report_low_ack() based on its own algorithm. For such
2548  *	drivers, mac80211 packet loss mechanism will not be triggered and driver
2549  *	is completely depending on firmware event for station kickout.
2550  *
2551  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG: Hardware does fragmentation by itself.
2552  *	The stack will not do fragmentation.
2553  *	The callback for @set_frag_threshold should be set as well.
2554  *
2555  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA: Hardware supports buffer STA on
2556  *	TDLS links.
2557  *
2558  * @IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP: The driver requires the
2559  *	mgd_prepare_tx() callback to be called before transmission of a
2560  *	deauthentication frame in case the association was completed but no
2561  *	beacon was heard. This is required in multi-channel scenarios, where the
2562  *	virtual interface might not be given air time for the transmission of
2563  *	the frame, as it is not synced with the AP/P2P GO yet, and thus the
2564  *	deauthentication frame might not be transmitted.
2565  *
2566  * @IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP: The driver (or firmware) doesn't
2567  *	support QoS NDP for AP probing - that's most likely a driver bug.
2568  *
2569  * @IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ: use the TXQ for bufferable MMPDUs, this of
2570  *	course requires the driver to use TXQs to start with.
2571  *
2572  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW: (Hardware) rate control supports VHT
2573  *	extended NSS BW (dot11VHTExtendedNSSBWCapable). This flag will be set if
2574  *	the selected rate control algorithm sets %RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW
2575  *	but if the rate control is built-in then it must be set by the driver.
2576  *	See also the documentation for that flag.
2577  *
2578  * @IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ: use the extra non-TID per-station TXQ for all
2579  *	MMPDUs on station interfaces. This of course requires the driver to use
2580  *	TXQs to start with.
2581  *
2582  * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN: Driver does not report accurate A-MPDU
2583  *	length in tx status information
2584  *
2585  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID
2586  *
2587  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID
2588  *	only for HE APs. Applies if @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID is set.
2589  *
2590  * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT: The card and driver is only
2591  *	aggregating MPDUs with the same keyid, allowing mac80211 to keep Tx
2592  *	A-MPDU sessions active while rekeying with Extended Key ID.
2593  *
2594  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_ENCAP_OFFLOAD: Hardware supports tx encapsulation
2595  *	offload
2596  *
2597  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RX_DECAP_OFFLOAD: Hardware supports rx decapsulation
2598  *	offload
2599  *
2600  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CONC_MON_RX_DECAP: Hardware supports concurrent rx
2601  *	decapsulation offload and passing raw 802.11 frames for monitor iface.
2602  *	If this is supported, the driver must pass both 802.3 frames for real
2603  *	usage and 802.11 frames with %RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR set for monitor to
2604  *	the stack.
2605  *
2606  * @IEEE80211_HW_DETECTS_COLOR_COLLISION: HW/driver has support for BSS color
2607  *	collision detection and doesn't need it in software.
2608  *
2609  * @IEEE80211_HW_MLO_MCAST_MULTI_LINK_TX: Hardware/driver handles transmitting
2610  *	multicast frames on all links, mac80211 should not do that.
2611  *
2612  * @NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS: number of hardware flags, used for sizing arrays
2613  */
2614 enum ieee80211_hw_flags {
2615 	IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL,
2616 	IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS,
2617 	IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING,
2618 	IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC,
2619 	IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM,
2620 	IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC,
2621 	IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT,
2622 	IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION,
2623 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS,
2624 	IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK,
2625 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS,
2626 	IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE,
2627 	IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF,
2628 	IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF,
2629 	IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL,
2630 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT,
2631 	IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS,
2632 	IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR,
2633 	IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL,
2634 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK,
2635 	IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS,
2636 	IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW,
2637 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE,
2638 	IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF,
2639 	IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY,
2640 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES,
2641 	IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA,
2642 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS,
2643 	IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS,
2644 	IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW,
2645 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU,
2646 	IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS,
2647 	IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR,
2648 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER,
2649 	IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS,
2650 	IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU,
2651 	IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST,
2652 	IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK,
2653 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG,
2654 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA,
2655 	IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP,
2656 	IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP,
2657 	IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ,
2658 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW,
2659 	IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ,
2660 	IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN,
2661 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID,
2662 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID,
2663 	IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT,
2664 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_ENCAP_OFFLOAD,
2665 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RX_DECAP_OFFLOAD,
2666 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CONC_MON_RX_DECAP,
2667 	IEEE80211_HW_DETECTS_COLOR_COLLISION,
2668 	IEEE80211_HW_MLO_MCAST_MULTI_LINK_TX,
2669 
2670 	/* keep last, obviously */
2671 	NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS
2672 };
2673 
2674 /**
2675  * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state
2676  *
2677  * This structure contains the configuration and hardware
2678  * information for an 802.11 PHY.
2679  *
2680  * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this
2681  *	802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev
2682  *	members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV()
2683  *	and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported
2684  *	bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here.
2685  *
2686  * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use.
2687  *
2688  * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use
2689  *	along with this structure.
2690  *
2691  * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags.
2692  *
2693  * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb
2694  *	for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.)
2695  *
2696  * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb.
2697  *	Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs.
2698  *
2699  * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used
2700  *	only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB
2701  *
2702  * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval
2703  *	that HW supports
2704  *
2705  * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for
2706  *	data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these
2707  *	queues need to have configurable access parameters.
2708  *
2709  * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware.
2710  *	If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be
2711  *	set before calling ieee80211_register_hw().
2712  *
2713  * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2714  *	within &struct ieee80211_vif.
2715  * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2716  *	within &struct ieee80211_sta.
2717  * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2718  *	within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf.
2719  * @txq_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2720  *	within @struct ieee80211_txq.
2721  *
2722  * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw
2723  *	can handle.
2724  * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages
2725  *	the hw can report back.
2726  * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage
2727  *
2728  * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of
2729  *	sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver
2730  *	aggregation.
2731  *	This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the
2732  *	number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering
2733  *	it shouldn't be set.
2734  *
2735  * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an
2736  *	aggregate an HT/HE device will transmit. In HT AddBA we'll
2737  *	advertise a constant value of 64 as some older APs crash if
2738  *	the window size is smaller (an example is LinkSys WRT120N
2739  *	with FW v1.0.07 build 002 Jun 18 2012).
2740  *	For AddBA to HE capable peers this value will be used.
2741  *
2742  * @max_tx_fragments: maximum number of tx buffers per (A)-MSDU, sum
2743  *	of 1 + skb_shinfo(skb)->nr_frags for each skb in the frag_list.
2744  *
2745  * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX
2746  *	(if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set)
2747  *
2748  * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW
2749  *	reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't
2750  *	include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_\* values, only
2751  *	adding _BW is supported today.
2752  *
2753  * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports,
2754  *	the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH.
2755  *	Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_\* values.
2756  *
2757  * @radiotap_he: HE radiotap validity flags
2758  *
2759  * @radiotap_timestamp: Information for the radiotap timestamp field; if the
2760  *	@units_pos member is set to a non-negative value then the timestamp
2761  *	field will be added and populated from the &struct ieee80211_rx_status
2762  *	device_timestamp.
2763  * @radiotap_timestamp.units_pos: Must be set to a combination of a
2764  *	IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_UNIT_* and a
2765  *	IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_SPOS_* value.
2766  * @radiotap_timestamp.accuracy: If non-negative, fills the accuracy in the
2767  *	radiotap field and the accuracy known flag will be set.
2768  *
2769  * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created
2770  *	from this HW. Note that not all features are usable with mac80211,
2771  *	other features will be rejected during HW registration.
2772  *
2773  * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate
2774  *	for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery-
2775  *	enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap.
2776  *	Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means
2777  *	that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means
2778  *	neither enabled.
2779  *
2780  * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may
2781  *	deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA.
2782  *	Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values.
2783  *
2784  * @max_nan_de_entries: maximum number of NAN DE functions supported by the
2785  *	device.
2786  *
2787  * @tx_sk_pacing_shift: Pacing shift to set on TCP sockets when frames from
2788  *	them are encountered. The default should typically not be changed,
2789  *	unless the driver has good reasons for needing more buffers.
2790  *
2791  * @weight_multiplier: Driver specific airtime weight multiplier used while
2792  *	refilling deficit of each TXQ.
2793  *
2794  * @max_mtu: the max mtu could be set.
2795  *
2796  * @tx_power_levels: a list of power levels supported by the wifi hardware.
2797  * 	The power levels can be specified either as integer or fractions.
2798  * 	The power level at idx 0 shall be the maximum positive power level.
2799  *
2800  * @max_txpwr_levels_idx: the maximum valid idx of 'tx_power_levels' list.
2801  */
2802 struct ieee80211_hw {
2803 	struct ieee80211_conf conf;
2804 	struct wiphy *wiphy;
2805 	const char *rate_control_algorithm;
2806 	void *priv;
2807 	unsigned long flags[BITS_TO_LONGS(NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS)];
2808 	unsigned int extra_tx_headroom;
2809 	unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom;
2810 	int vif_data_size;
2811 	int sta_data_size;
2812 	int chanctx_data_size;
2813 	int txq_data_size;
2814 	u16 queues;
2815 	u16 max_listen_interval;
2816 	s8 max_signal;
2817 	u8 max_rates;
2818 	u8 max_report_rates;
2819 	u8 max_rate_tries;
2820 	u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
2821 	u16 max_tx_aggregation_subframes;
2822 	u8 max_tx_fragments;
2823 	u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue;
2824 	u8 radiotap_mcs_details;
2825 	u16 radiotap_vht_details;
2826 	struct {
2827 		int units_pos;
2828 		s16 accuracy;
2829 	} radiotap_timestamp;
2830 	netdev_features_t netdev_features;
2831 	u8 uapsd_queues;
2832 	u8 uapsd_max_sp_len;
2833 	u8 max_nan_de_entries;
2834 	u8 tx_sk_pacing_shift;
2835 	u8 weight_multiplier;
2836 	u32 max_mtu;
2837 	const s8 *tx_power_levels;
2838 	u8 max_txpwr_levels_idx;
2839 
2840 	ANDROID_KABI_RESERVE(1);
2841 };
2842 
_ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)2843 static inline bool _ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2844 				       enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2845 {
2846 	return test_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2847 }
2848 #define ieee80211_hw_check(hw, flg)	_ieee80211_hw_check(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2849 
_ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)2850 static inline void _ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2851 				     enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2852 {
2853 	return __set_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2854 }
2855 #define ieee80211_hw_set(hw, flg)	_ieee80211_hw_set(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2856 
2857 /**
2858  * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request
2859  *
2860  * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie)
2861  * @req: cfg80211 request.
2862  */
2863 struct ieee80211_scan_request {
2864 	struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies;
2865 
2866 	/* Keep last */
2867 	struct cfg80211_scan_request req;
2868 };
2869 
2870 /**
2871  * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters
2872  *
2873  * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from
2874  * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request
2875  * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode
2876  * @status: channel-switch response status
2877  * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received
2878  * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2879  * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2880  * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template
2881  * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb
2882  */
2883 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params {
2884 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2885 	struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef;
2886 	u8 action_code;
2887 	u32 status;
2888 	u32 timestamp;
2889 	u16 switch_time;
2890 	u16 switch_timeout;
2891 	struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb;
2892 	u32 ch_sw_tm_ie;
2893 };
2894 
2895 /**
2896  * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy
2897  *
2898  * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query
2899  *
2900  * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective
2901  * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private
2902  * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should
2903  * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this
2904  * is already used internally by mac80211.
2905  *
2906  * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy.
2907  */
2908 struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy);
2909 
2910 /**
2911  * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware
2912  *
2913  * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for
2914  * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
2915  */
SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct device * dev)2916 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev)
2917 {
2918 	set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev);
2919 }
2920 
2921 /**
2922  * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware
2923  *
2924  * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for
2925  * @addr: the address to set
2926  */
SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,const u8 * addr)2927 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, const u8 *addr)
2928 {
2929 	memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN);
2930 }
2931 
2932 static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw * hw,const struct ieee80211_tx_info * c)2933 ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2934 		      const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
2935 {
2936 	if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0))
2937 		return NULL;
2938 	return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx];
2939 }
2940 
2941 static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw * hw,const struct ieee80211_tx_info * c)2942 ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2943 			   const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
2944 {
2945 	if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0)
2946 		return NULL;
2947 	return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx];
2948 }
2949 
2950 static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw * hw,const struct ieee80211_tx_info * c,int idx)2951 ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2952 			     const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx)
2953 {
2954 	if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0)
2955 		return NULL;
2956 	return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx];
2957 }
2958 
2959 /**
2960  * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb
2961  * @hw: the hardware
2962  * @skb: the skb
2963  *
2964  * Free a transmit skb. Use this function when some failure
2965  * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported.
2966  */
2967 void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
2968 
2969 /**
2970  * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration
2971  *
2972  * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware
2973  * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations.
2974  *
2975  * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given
2976  * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and
2977  * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL
2978  * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to
2979  * the station information for the peer for individual keys.
2980  * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when
2981  * VLANs are configured for an access point.
2982  *
2983  * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx
2984  * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf
2985  * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function.
2986  *
2987  * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if
2988  * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be
2989  * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the
2990  * hardware key index, you are free to use the full u8 range.
2991  *
2992  * Note that in the case that the @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL flag is
2993  * set, mac80211 will not automatically fall back to software crypto if
2994  * enabling hardware crypto failed. The set_key() call may also return the
2995  * value 1 to permit this specific key/algorithm to be done in software.
2996  *
2997  * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed.
2998  *
2999  * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key
3000  * for it has been uploaded to hardware, the stack will not make any
3001  * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather
3002  * based on the receive flags.
3003  *
3004  * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key
3005  * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key()
3006  * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate
3007  * keys.
3008  *
3009  * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption
3010  * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key
3011  * handler.
3012  * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key.
3013  * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The
3014  * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did
3015  * rekeying), it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is
3016  * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this
3017  * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16.
3018  *
3019  * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index
3020  * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required
3021  * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses).
3022  *
3023  * Mac80211 drivers should set the @NL80211_EXT_FEATURE_CAN_REPLACE_PTK0 flag
3024  * when they are able to replace in-use PTK keys according to the following
3025  * requirements:
3026  * 1) They do not hand over frames decrypted with the old key to mac80211
3027       once the call to set_key() with command %DISABLE_KEY has been completed,
3028    2) either drop or continue to use the old key for any outgoing frames queued
3029       at the time of the key deletion (including re-transmits),
3030    3) never send out a frame queued prior to the set_key() %SET_KEY command
3031       encrypted with the new key when also needing
3032       @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV and
3033    4) never send out a frame unencrypted when it should be encrypted.
3034    Mac80211 will not queue any new frames for a deleted key to the driver.
3035  */
3036 
3037 /**
3038  * DOC: Powersave support
3039  *
3040  * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations.
3041  *
3042  * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself,
3043  * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware
3044  * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode
3045  * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status.
3046  * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary,
3047  * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required
3048  * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when
3049  * it finds traffic directed to it.
3050  *
3051  * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in
3052  * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused
3053  * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking
3054  * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it
3055  * back to sleep at appropriate times.
3056  *
3057  * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the
3058  * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be
3059  * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame.
3060  *
3061  * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also
3062  * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported
3063  * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and
3064  * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still
3065  * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle
3066  * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that
3067  * as best as it can, mac80211 is too slow to do that.
3068  *
3069  * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the
3070  * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a
3071  * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to
3072  * the next wakeup. It's compromise of getting good enough latency when
3073  * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle
3074  * periods.
3075  *
3076  * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling
3077  * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS
3078  * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally,
3079  * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the
3080  * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support
3081  * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the
3082  * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value
3083  * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable
3084  * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS
3085  * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave.
3086  *
3087  * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling
3088  * %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the
3089  * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS
3090  * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To
3091  * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames
3092  * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled.
3093  *
3094  * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with
3095  * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK.
3096  */
3097 
3098 /**
3099  * DOC: Beacon filter support
3100  *
3101  * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups
3102  * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that
3103  * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly
3104  * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the
3105  * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That
3106  * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information
3107  * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed.
3108  *
3109  * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER
3110  * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support
3111  * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When
3112  * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the
3113  * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss().
3114  *
3115  * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the
3116  * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call
3117  * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled
3118  * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future.
3119  *
3120  * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing
3121  * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211
3122  * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense
3123  * that we want to see changes in them. This will include
3124  *
3125  *  - a list of information element IDs
3126  *  - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element
3127  *
3128  * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the
3129  * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense
3130  * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device
3131  * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all
3132  * vendor information elements.
3133  *
3134  * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information
3135  * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon.
3136  *
3137  * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead, just make sure nothing
3138  * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing
3139  * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and
3140  * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136,
3141  * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility
3142  * it could also include some currently unused IDs.
3143  *
3144  *
3145  * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the
3146  * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming
3147  * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of
3148  * the received data packets). This can consist in notifying the host when
3149  * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above
3150  * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be
3151  * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement
3152  * them as the roaming algorithm requires.
3153  *
3154  * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to
3155  * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the
3156  * signal strength threshold checking.
3157  */
3158 
3159 /**
3160  * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save
3161  *
3162  * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve
3163  * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism
3164  * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009)
3165  * "11.2.3 SM power save".
3166  *
3167  * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames
3168  * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct
3169  * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the
3170  * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware
3171  * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by
3172  * hardware flags.
3173  *
3174  * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211
3175  * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS
3176  * turned off otherwise.
3177  *
3178  * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate
3179  * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config()
3180  * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to
3181  * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP.
3182  */
3183 
3184 /**
3185  * DOC: Frame filtering
3186  *
3187  * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper
3188  * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when
3189  * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption,
3190  * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is
3191  * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible.
3192  *
3193  * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell
3194  * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be
3195  * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out.
3196  *
3197  * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast()
3198  * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list
3199  * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces.
3200  * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to
3201  * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the
3202  * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and
3203  * @total_flags with the new flag states.
3204  *
3205  * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will
3206  * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count
3207  * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted
3208  * or dropped.
3209  *
3210  * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared.
3211  * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_
3212  * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore
3213  * the flag, but not clear it.
3214  * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the
3215  * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type
3216  * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it).
3217  * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware
3218  * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes
3219  * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them,
3220  * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag.
3221  * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well.
3222  */
3223 
3224 /**
3225  * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients
3226  *
3227  * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for
3228  * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD.
3229  * There currently is no support for sAPSD.
3230  *
3231  * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client
3232  * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time.
3233  * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but
3234  * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies
3235  * the driver code.
3236  *
3237  * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete
3238  * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set,
3239  * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for
3240  * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames.
3241  * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of
3242  * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't
3243  * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD.
3244  *
3245  * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the
3246  * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a
3247  * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is,
3248  * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is
3249  * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this
3250  * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to
3251  * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will
3252  * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The
3253  * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its
3254  * @sta_notify callback.
3255  *
3256  * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up,
3257  * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period.
3258  * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and
3259  * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When
3260  * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211
3261  * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames
3262  * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit
3263  * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER
3264  * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only
3265  * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to
3266  * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have
3267  * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS.
3268  * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is
3269  * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer.
3270  *
3271  * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by
3272  * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them.
3273  *
3274  * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi
3275  * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up
3276  * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being
3277  * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong
3278  * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be
3279  * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to
3280  * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can
3281  * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it
3282  * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames
3283  * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again
3284  * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked.
3285  *
3286  * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any
3287  * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is
3288  * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any
3289  * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up
3290  * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when
3291  * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service
3292  * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called
3293  * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are
3294  * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting
3295  * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames,
3296  * to help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if
3297  * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames
3298  * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the
3299  * buffers for those TIDs contain.
3300  *
3301  * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may
3302  * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must
3303  * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that
3304  * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid
3305  * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released
3306  * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp()
3307  * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway.
3308  *
3309  * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211
3310  * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags
3311  * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
3312  * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame.
3313  * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case.
3314  *
3315  * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data
3316  * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as
3317  * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame
3318  * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed.
3319  */
3320 
3321 /**
3322  * DOC: HW queue control
3323  *
3324  * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static
3325  * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This
3326  * was problematic for a few reasons:
3327  * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames
3328  * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly
3329  * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames
3330  *
3331  * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all
3332  * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it
3333  * won't have the same problem with the software queues.
3334  *
3335  * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability
3336  * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do
3337  * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif
3338  * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will
3339  * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and
3340  * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors
3341  * the hardware queue.
3342  * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue
3343  * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.)
3344  *
3345  * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed, multiple virtual
3346  * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to
3347  * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a
3348  * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have
3349  * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios:
3350  *
3351  * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3
3352  * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7
3353  * after-DTIM queue for AP:   8
3354  * off-channel queue:         9
3355  *
3356  * It would then set up the hardware like this:
3357  *   hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9
3358  *
3359  * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows:
3360  *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0
3361  *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1
3362  *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2
3363  *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3
3364  *   vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
3365  * and the second virtual interface with 4-7.
3366  *
3367  * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second
3368  * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC.
3369  *
3370  * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
3371  * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the
3372  * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when
3373  * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode.
3374  */
3375 
3376 /**
3377  * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags
3378  *
3379  * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be
3380  * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the
3381  * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested,
3382  * but this has negative impact on power consumption.
3383  *
3384  * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested
3385  *	by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by
3386  *	multicast address.
3387  *
3388  * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the
3389  *	%RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them)
3390  *
3391  * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set
3392  *	the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them
3393  *
3394  * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate
3395  *	to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses
3396  *	by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing
3397  *	mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should
3398  *	honour this flag if possible.
3399  *
3400  * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll) addressed to this
3401  *	station
3402  *
3403  * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes
3404  *
3405  * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames
3406  *
3407  * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames
3408  *
3409  * @FIF_MCAST_ACTION: pass multicast Action frames
3410  */
3411 enum ieee80211_filter_flags {
3412 	FIF_ALLMULTI		= 1<<1,
3413 	FIF_FCSFAIL		= 1<<2,
3414 	FIF_PLCPFAIL		= 1<<3,
3415 	FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC	= 1<<4,
3416 	FIF_CONTROL		= 1<<5,
3417 	FIF_OTHER_BSS		= 1<<6,
3418 	FIF_PSPOLL		= 1<<7,
3419 	FIF_PROBE_REQ		= 1<<8,
3420 	FIF_MCAST_ACTION	= 1<<9,
3421 };
3422 
3423 /**
3424  * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions
3425  *
3426  * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in
3427  * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed.
3428  *
3429  * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation
3430  * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by
3431  * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer
3432  * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away!
3433  *
3434  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation
3435  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation
3436  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation, the driver must either
3437  *	call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() or
3438  *	call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() with status
3439  *	%IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_DELAY_ADDBA to delay addba after
3440  *	ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe is called, or just return the special
3441  *	status %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE.
3442  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational
3443  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting
3444  *	queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the
3445  *	driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe().
3446  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets,
3447  *	called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call
3448  *	ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the
3449  *	session is gone and removes the station.
3450  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped
3451  *	but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and
3452  *	now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers
3453  *	should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called.
3454  */
3455 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action {
3456 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START,
3457 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP,
3458 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START,
3459 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT,
3460 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH,
3461 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT,
3462 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL,
3463 };
3464 
3465 #define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE 1
3466 #define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_DELAY_ADDBA 2
3467 
3468 /**
3469  * struct ieee80211_ampdu_params - AMPDU action parameters
3470  *
3471  * @action: the ampdu action, value from %ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
3472  * @sta: peer of this AMPDU session
3473  * @tid: tid of the BA session
3474  * @ssn: start sequence number of the session. TX/RX_STOP can pass 0. When
3475  *	action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START the driver passes back the
3476  *	actual ssn value used to start the session and writes the value here.
3477  * @buf_size: reorder buffer size  (number of subframes). Valid only when the
3478  *	action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START or
3479  *	%IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
3480  * @amsdu: indicates the peer's ability to receive A-MSDU within A-MPDU.
3481  *	valid when the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
3482  * @timeout: BA session timeout. Valid only when the action is set to
3483  *	%IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START
3484  */
3485 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params {
3486 	enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action;
3487 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
3488 	u16 tid;
3489 	u16 ssn;
3490 	u16 buf_size;
3491 	bool amsdu;
3492 	u16 timeout;
3493 };
3494 
3495 /**
3496  * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason
3497  * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll
3498  * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to
3499  *	frame received on trigger-enabled AC
3500  */
3501 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type {
3502 	IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL,
3503 	IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD,
3504 };
3505 
3506 /**
3507  * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed
3508  *
3509  * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit
3510  *	to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station
3511  *	information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40
3512  *	flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes.
3513  * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed.
3514  * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer
3515  *	changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about
3516  *	the peer.
3517  * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed
3518  *	by the peer
3519  */
3520 enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed {
3521 	IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED		= BIT(0),
3522 	IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED	= BIT(1),
3523 	IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED	= BIT(2),
3524 	IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED	= BIT(3),
3525 };
3526 
3527 /**
3528  * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type
3529  *
3530  * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations,
3531  * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other
3532  * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vice versa).
3533  * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC
3534  * operations compared to other operations/flows.
3535  *
3536  * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC.
3537  * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required
3538  *	for sending management frames offchannel.
3539  */
3540 enum ieee80211_roc_type {
3541 	IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0,
3542 	IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX,
3543 };
3544 
3545 /**
3546  * enum ieee80211_reconfig_type - reconfig type
3547  *
3548  * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what
3549  * reconfiguration type was completed.
3550  *
3551  * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type
3552  *	(also due to resume() callback returning 1)
3553  * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless
3554  *	of wowlan configuration)
3555  */
3556 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type {
3557 	IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART,
3558 	IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND,
3559 };
3560 
3561 /**
3562  * struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info - prepare TX information
3563  * @duration: if non-zero, hint about the required duration,
3564  *	only used with the mgd_prepare_tx() method.
3565  * @subtype: frame subtype (auth, (re)assoc, deauth, disassoc)
3566  * @success: whether the frame exchange was successful, only
3567  *	used with the mgd_complete_tx() method, and then only
3568  *	valid for auth and (re)assoc.
3569  */
3570 struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info {
3571 	u16 duration;
3572 	u16 subtype;
3573 	u8 success:1;
3574 };
3575 
3576 /**
3577  * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver
3578  *
3579  * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may
3580  * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure
3581  * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame.
3582  *
3583  * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame.
3584  *	skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header.
3585  *	The low-level driver should send the frame out based on
3586  *	configuration in the TX control data. This handler should,
3587  *	preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately.
3588  *	Must be atomic.
3589  *
3590  * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware
3591  *	is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on
3592  *	frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.)
3593  *	Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace,
3594  *	or zero.
3595  *	When the device is started it should not have a MAC address
3596  *	to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device
3597  *	is added.
3598  *	Must be implemented and can sleep.
3599  *
3600  * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware
3601  *	is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least
3602  *	it must turn off frame reception.)
3603  *	May be called right after add_interface if that rejects
3604  *	an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue
3605  *	you should ensure to cancel it on this callback.
3606  *	Must be implemented and can sleep.
3607  *
3608  * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and
3609  *	stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then
3610  *	ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is
3611  *	configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and
3612  *	reconfigured at resume time.
3613  *	The driver may also impose special conditions under which it
3614  *	wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only
3615  *	supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it
3616  *	must return 1 from this function.
3617  *
3618  * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is
3619  *	now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully
3620  *	functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is
3621  *	to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211
3622  *	will also go through the regular complete restart on resume.
3623  *
3624  * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is
3625  *	modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is
3626  *	supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only
3627  *	in suspend().
3628  *
3629  * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is
3630  *	enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start
3631  *	and @stop must be implemented.
3632  *	The driver should perform any initialization it needs before
3633  *	the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the
3634  *	interface is given in the conf parameter.
3635  *	The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a
3636  *	negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.)
3637  *	Must be implemented and can sleep.
3638  *
3639  * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback
3640  *	is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be
3641  *	switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep.
3642  *	Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be
3643  *	found by the interface iteration callbacks.
3644  *
3645  * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down.
3646  *	The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface
3647  *	and no monitor interfaces are present.
3648  *	When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware
3649  *	must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets,
3650  *	the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the
3651  *	MAC address of the device going away.
3652  *	Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep.
3653  *
3654  * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this
3655  *	function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel.
3656  *	This function should never fail but returns a negative error code
3657  *	if it does. The callback can sleep.
3658  *
3659  * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS
3660  *	parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low
3661  *	level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters).
3662  *	This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless
3663  *	for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which
3664  *	of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback
3665  *	can sleep.
3666  *	Note: this callback is called if @vif_cfg_changed or @link_info_changed
3667  *	are not implemented.
3668  *
3669  * @vif_cfg_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to interface
3670  *	(MLD) parameters from &struct ieee80211_vif_cfg that vary during the
3671  *	lifetime of the interface (e.g. assoc status, IP addresses, etc.)
3672  *	The @changed parameter indicates which value changed.
3673  *	The callback can sleep.
3674  *
3675  * @link_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to link
3676  *	parameters from &struct ieee80211_bss_conf that are related to an
3677  *	individual link. e.g. legacy/HT/VHT/... rate information.
3678  *	The @changed parameter indicates which value changed, and the @link_id
3679  *	parameter indicates the link ID. Note that the @link_id will be 0 for
3680  *	non-MLO connections.
3681  *	The callback can sleep.
3682  *
3683  * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration.
3684  *	This callback is optional, and its return value is passed
3685  *	to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic.
3686  *
3687  * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter.
3688  *	See the section "Frame filtering" for more information.
3689  *	This callback must be implemented and can sleep.
3690  *
3691  * @config_iface_filter: Configure the interface's RX filter.
3692  *	This callback is optional and is used to configure which frames
3693  *	should be passed to mac80211. The filter_flags is the combination
3694  *	of FIF_* flags. The changed_flags is a bit mask that indicates
3695  *	which flags are changed.
3696  *	This callback can sleep.
3697  *
3698  * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit
3699  * 	must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic.
3700  *
3701  * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3702  *	This callback is only called between add_interface and
3703  *	remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface
3704  *	is enabled.
3705  *	Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added.
3706  *	The callback can sleep.
3707  *
3708  * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3709  * 	This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers
3710  * 	which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY.
3711  *	The callback must be atomic.
3712  *
3713  * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the
3714  *	host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data
3715  *	necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter.
3716  *	After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify
3717  *	userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify().
3718  *
3719  * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for
3720  *	WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP
3721  *	offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it.
3722  *
3723  * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start
3724  *	the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel
3725  *	configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's
3726  *	registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure
3727  *	that power save is disabled.
3728  *	The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the
3729  *	entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these
3730  *	at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the
3731  *	(extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable).
3732  *	When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called;
3733  *	note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to
3734  *	any error unless this callback returned a negative error code.
3735  *	This callback is also allowed to return the special return value 1,
3736  *	this indicates that hardware scan isn't desirable right now and a
3737  *	software scan should be done instead. A driver wishing to use this
3738  *	capability must ensure its (hardware) scan capabilities aren't
3739  *	advertised as more capable than mac80211's software scan is.
3740  *	The callback can sleep.
3741  *
3742  * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan.
3743  *	The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible),
3744  *	but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call
3745  *	ieee80211_scan_completed().
3746  *	This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new
3747  *	scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended.
3748  *	The callback can sleep.
3749  *
3750  * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at
3751  *	specific intervals.  The driver must call the
3752  *	ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results.
3753  *	This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called.
3754  *
3755  * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan.
3756  *	In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called.
3757  *
3758  * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan
3759  *	is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification.
3760  *	The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR,
3761  *	the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it
3762  *	can use this parameter. The callback can sleep.
3763  *
3764  * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a
3765  *	software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need
3766  *	this notification.
3767  *	The callback can sleep.
3768  *
3769  * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics.
3770  * 	Returns zero if statistics are available.
3771  *	The callback can sleep.
3772  *
3773  * @get_key_seq: If your device implements encryption in hardware and does
3774  *	IV/PN assignment then this callback should be provided to read the
3775  *	IV/PN for the given key from hardware.
3776  *	The callback must be atomic.
3777  *
3778  * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this
3779  *	if the device does fragmentation by itself. Note that to prevent the
3780  *	stack from doing fragmentation IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG
3781  *	should be set as well.
3782  *	The callback can sleep.
3783  *
3784  * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it)
3785  *	The callback can sleep.
3786  *
3787  * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station,
3788  *	AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep.
3789  *
3790  * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated
3791  *	station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback
3792  *	returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected;
3793  *	no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing
3794  *	the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3795  *	This callback can sleep.
3796  *
3797  * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files
3798  *	when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback
3799  *	should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This
3800  *	callback can sleep.
3801  *
3802  * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an
3803  *	associated station, AP,  IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating
3804  *	in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag
3805  *	%IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic.
3806  *
3807  * @sta_set_txpwr: Configure the station tx power. This callback set the tx
3808  *	power for the station.
3809  *	This callback can sleep.
3810  *
3811  * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a
3812  *	station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.)
3813  *	This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove.
3814  *	It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions
3815  *	up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it
3816  *	isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace
3817  *	period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station.
3818  *	See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3819  *	The callback can sleep.
3820  *
3821  * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU
3822  *	synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station
3823  *	pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear
3824  *	the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse
3825  *	in @sta_state.
3826  *	The callback can sleep.
3827  *
3828  * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be
3829  *	used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits
3830  *	from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected
3831  *	in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver
3832  *	uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since
3833  *	otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly.
3834  *	Must be atomic.
3835  * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This
3836  *	is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses
3837  *	the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic.
3838  *
3839  * @sta_statistics: Get statistics for this station. For example with beacon
3840  *	filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be accurate, so
3841  *	let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can fill most of
3842  *	the values (indicating which by setting the filled bitmap), but not
3843  *	all of them make sense - see the source for which ones are possible.
3844  *	Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211.
3845  *	The callback can sleep.
3846  *
3847  * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max),
3848  *	bursting) for a hardware TX queue.
3849  *	Returns a negative error code on failure.
3850  *	The callback can sleep.
3851  *
3852  * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently,
3853  *	this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a
3854  *	required function.
3855  *	The callback can sleep.
3856  *
3857  * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware.
3858  *	Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a
3859  *	required function.
3860  *	The callback can sleep.
3861  *
3862  * @offset_tsf: Offset the TSF timer by the specified value in the
3863  *	firmware/hardware.  Preferred to set_tsf as it avoids delay between
3864  *	calling set_tsf() and hardware getting programmed, which will show up
3865  *	as TSF delay. Is not a required function.
3866  *	The callback can sleep.
3867  *
3868  * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize
3869  *	with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This
3870  *	function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of
3871  *	TSF synchronization.
3872  *	The callback can sleep.
3873  *
3874  * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us.
3875  *	This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is
3876  *	used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests.
3877  *	Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon.
3878  *	The callback can sleep.
3879  *
3880  * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information
3881  *
3882  * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also
3883  *	need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration,
3884  *	and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback.
3885  *	The callback can sleep.
3886  *
3887  * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified
3888  *	in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout
3889  *	accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout
3890  *	estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for
3891  *	coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep.
3892  *
3893  * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may
3894  *	be %NULL. The callback can sleep.
3895  * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep.
3896  *
3897  * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure
3898  *	that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap
3899  *	of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces
3900  *	use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues.
3901  *	If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped.
3902  *	Note that vif can be NULL.
3903  *	The callback can sleep.
3904  *
3905  * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel
3906  *	switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this
3907  *	callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate
3908  *	completion of the channel switch.
3909  *
3910  * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device.
3911  *	Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may
3912  *	reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL
3913  *	(also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX).
3914  *
3915  * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant).
3916  *
3917  * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must
3918  *	call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note
3919  *	that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw
3920  *	offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted
3921  *	normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the
3922  *	duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call
3923  *	ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired().
3924  *	Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and
3925  *	must be accepted in this case.
3926  *	This callback may sleep.
3927  * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is
3928  *	aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep.
3929  *
3930  * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes.
3931  *
3932  * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes.
3933  *
3934  * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware
3935  *	queues before entering power save.
3936  *
3937  * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection
3938  *	when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled.
3939  *	The callback can sleep.
3940  * @event_callback: Notify driver about any event in mac80211. See
3941  *	&enum ieee80211_event_type for the different types.
3942  *	The callback must be atomic.
3943  *
3944  * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given
3945  *	parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for
3946  *	sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver
3947  *	to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD.
3948  *	Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check
3949  *	if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than
3950  *	the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in
3951  *	the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the
3952  *	more-data bit must always be set.
3953  *	The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames
3954  *	from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set.
3955  *	In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the
3956  *	@num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In
3957  *	this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3958  *	on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll
3959  *	period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple
3960  *	responses for a retried PS-poll frame.
3961  *	In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be
3962  *	bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send
3963  *	at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for
3964  *	setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the
3965  *	service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP
3966  *	on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function
3967  *	ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP.
3968  *	This callback must be atomic.
3969  * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames
3970  *	to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211
3971  *	via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames
3972  *	released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set
3973  *	and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case
3974  *	frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder
3975  *	them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3976  *	on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP
3977  *	bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the
3978  *	ieee80211_sta_eosp() function.
3979  *	The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the
3980  *	frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set.
3981  *	This callback must be atomic.
3982  *
3983  * @get_et_sset_count:  Ethtool API to get string-set count.
3984  *
3985  * @get_et_stats:  Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats.
3986  *
3987  * @get_et_strings:  Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats
3988  *	and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets.
3989  *
3990  * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association
3991  *	before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is
3992  *	bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated
3993  *	yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any
3994  *	transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's
3995  *	powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a
3996  *	management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the
3997  *	driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response
3998  *	and to be able to synchronize with the GO.
3999  *	For drivers that set %IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP, mac80211
4000  *	would also call this function before transmitting a deauthentication
4001  *	frame in case that no beacon was heard from the AP/P2P GO.
4002  *	The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return
4003  *	mac80211 will transmit the frame right away.
4004  *	Additional information is passed in the &struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info
4005  *	data. If duration there is greater than zero, mac80211 hints to the
4006  *	driver the duration for which the operation is requested.
4007  *	The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep.
4008  * @mgd_complete_tx: Notify the driver that the response frame for a previously
4009  *	transmitted frame announced with @mgd_prepare_tx was received, the data
4010  *	is filled similarly to @mgd_prepare_tx though the duration is not used.
4011  *
4012  * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending
4013  *	a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's
4014  *	channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS
4015  *	setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP.
4016  *	mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS
4017  *	discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least
4018  *	2 * (DTIM period).
4019  *	The callback is optional and can sleep.
4020  *
4021  * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation.
4022  *	This callback may sleep.
4023  * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction.
4024  *	This callback may sleep.
4025  * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that
4026  *	may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same
4027  *	channel context with different settings
4028  *	This callback may sleep.
4029  * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound
4030  *	to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping.
4031  *	This callback may sleep.
4032  * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being
4033  *	unbound from vif.
4034  *	This callback may sleep.
4035  * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to
4036  *	another, as specified in the list of
4037  *	@ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according
4038  *	to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode.
4039  *	This callback may sleep.
4040  *
4041  * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the
4042  *	information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel
4043  *	context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses
4044  *	software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is
4045  *	just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being
4046  *	disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed.
4047  * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface.
4048  *
4049  * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and
4050  *	during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed.
4051  *	This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and
4052  *	indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames).
4053  *	This callback may sleep.
4054  *
4055  * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed.
4056  *	Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces.
4057  *	This callback is optional; it must not sleep.
4058  *
4059  * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel.
4060  *	Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this
4061  *	function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be
4062  *	decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call
4063  *	ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get()
4064  *	get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is
4065  *	1 using ieee80211_beacon_counter_is_complete() after the beacon has been
4066  *	transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish().
4067  *	If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called,
4068  *	since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway.
4069  * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
4070  *	before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA
4071  *	gets a CSA or a userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing
4072  *	the driver to prepare for the channel switch.
4073  * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
4074  *	after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the
4075  *	driver to go back to a normal configuration.
4076  * @abort_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
4077  *	when channel switch procedure was completed, allowing the
4078  *	driver to go back to a normal configuration.
4079  * @channel_switch_rx_beacon: This is an optional callback that is called
4080  *	when channel switch procedure is in progress and additional beacon with
4081  *	CSA IE was received, allowing driver to track changes in count.
4082  * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all
4083  *	information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A
4084  *	channel context is bound before this is called.
4085  * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again.
4086  *
4087  * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the
4088  *	specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0
4089  *	if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide.
4090  *
4091  * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration
4092  *	and hardware limits.
4093  *
4094  * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver
4095  *	is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations
4096  *	and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The
4097  *	driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of
4098  *	the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation.
4099  *	The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can
4100  *	optionally copy the skb for further re-use.
4101  * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both
4102  *	peers must be on the base channel when the call completes.
4103  * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or
4104  *	response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets
4105  *	parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue
4106  *	an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch
4107  *	response template is provided, together with the location of the
4108  *	switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within
4109  *	the function call.
4110  *
4111  * @wake_tx_queue: Called when new packets have been added to the queue.
4112  * @sync_rx_queues: Process all pending frames in RSS queues. This is a
4113  *	synchronization which is needed in case driver has in its RSS queues
4114  *	pending frames that were received prior to the control path action
4115  *	currently taken (e.g. disassociation) but are not processed yet.
4116  *
4117  * @start_nan: join an existing NAN cluster, or create a new one.
4118  * @stop_nan: leave the NAN cluster.
4119  * @nan_change_conf: change NAN configuration. The data in cfg80211_nan_conf
4120  *	contains full new configuration and changes specify which parameters
4121  *	are changed with respect to the last NAN config.
4122  *	The driver gets both full configuration and the changed parameters since
4123  *	some devices may need the full configuration while others need only the
4124  *	changed parameters.
4125  * @add_nan_func: Add a NAN function. Returns 0 on success. The data in
4126  *	cfg80211_nan_func must not be referenced outside the scope of
4127  *	this call.
4128  * @del_nan_func: Remove a NAN function. The driver must call
4129  *	ieee80211_nan_func_terminated() with
4130  *	NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_USER_REQUEST reason code upon removal.
4131  * @can_aggregate_in_amsdu: Called in order to determine if HW supports
4132  *	aggregating two specific frames in the same A-MSDU. The relation
4133  *	between the skbs should be symmetric and transitive. Note that while
4134  *	skb is always a real frame, head may or may not be an A-MSDU.
4135  * @get_ftm_responder_stats: Retrieve FTM responder statistics, if available.
4136  *	Statistics should be cumulative, currently no way to reset is provided.
4137  *
4138  * @start_pmsr: start peer measurement (e.g. FTM) (this call can sleep)
4139  * @abort_pmsr: abort peer measurement (this call can sleep)
4140  * @set_tid_config: Apply TID specific configurations. This callback may sleep.
4141  * @reset_tid_config: Reset TID specific configuration for the peer.
4142  *	This callback may sleep.
4143  * @update_vif_offload: Update virtual interface offload flags
4144  *	This callback may sleep.
4145  * @sta_set_4addr: Called to notify the driver when a station starts/stops using
4146  *	4-address mode
4147  * @set_sar_specs: Update the SAR (TX power) settings.
4148  * @sta_set_decap_offload: Called to notify the driver when a station is allowed
4149  *	to use rx decapsulation offload
4150  * @add_twt_setup: Update hw with TWT agreement parameters received from the peer.
4151  *	This callback allows the hw to check if requested parameters
4152  *	are supported and if there is enough room for a new agreement.
4153  *	The hw is expected to set agreement result in the req_type field of
4154  *	twt structure.
4155  * @twt_teardown_request: Update the hw with TWT teardown request received
4156  *	from the peer.
4157  * @set_radar_background: Configure dedicated offchannel chain available for
4158  *	radar/CAC detection on some hw. This chain can't be used to transmit
4159  *	or receive frames and it is bounded to a running wdev.
4160  *	Background radar/CAC detection allows to avoid the CAC downtime
4161  *	switching to a different channel during CAC detection on the selected
4162  *	radar channel.
4163  *	The caller is expected to set chandef pointer to NULL in order to
4164  *	disable background CAC/radar detection.
4165  * @net_fill_forward_path: Called from .ndo_fill_forward_path in order to
4166  *	resolve a path for hardware flow offloading
4167  * @change_vif_links: Change the valid links on an interface, note that while
4168  *	removing the old link information is still valid (link_conf pointer),
4169  *	but may immediately disappear after the function returns. The old or
4170  *	new links bitmaps may be 0 if going from/to a non-MLO situation.
4171  *	The @old array contains pointers to the old bss_conf structures
4172  *	that were already removed, in case they're needed.
4173  *	This callback can sleep.
4174  * @change_sta_links: Change the valid links of a station, similar to
4175  *	@change_vif_links. This callback can sleep.
4176  *	Note that a sta can also be inserted or removed with valid links,
4177  *	i.e. passed to @sta_add/@sta_state with sta->valid_links not zero.
4178  *	In fact, cannot change from having valid_links and not having them.
4179  */
4180 struct ieee80211_ops {
4181 	void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4182 		   struct ieee80211_tx_control *control,
4183 		   struct sk_buff *skb);
4184 	int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4185 	void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4186 #ifdef CONFIG_PM
4187 	int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan);
4188 	int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4189 	void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled);
4190 #endif
4191 	int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4192 			     struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4193 	int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4194 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4195 				enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p);
4196 	void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4197 				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4198 	int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed);
4199 	void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4200 				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4201 				 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info,
4202 				 u64 changed);
4203 	void (*vif_cfg_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4204 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4205 				u64 changed);
4206 	void (*link_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4207 				  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4208 				  struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info,
4209 				  u64 changed);
4210 
4211 	int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4212 			struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf);
4213 	void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4214 			struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf);
4215 
4216 	u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4217 				 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list);
4218 	void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4219 				 unsigned int changed_flags,
4220 				 unsigned int *total_flags,
4221 				 u64 multicast);
4222 	void (*config_iface_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4223 				    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4224 				    unsigned int filter_flags,
4225 				    unsigned int changed_flags);
4226 	int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4227 		       bool set);
4228 	int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd,
4229 		       struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4230 		       struct ieee80211_key_conf *key);
4231 	void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4232 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4233 				struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf,
4234 				struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4235 				u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key);
4236 	void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4237 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4238 			       struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data);
4239 	void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4240 					struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx);
4241 	int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4242 		       struct ieee80211_scan_request *req);
4243 	void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4244 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4245 	int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4246 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4247 				struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req,
4248 				struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies);
4249 	int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4250 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4251 	void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4252 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4253 			      const u8 *mac_addr);
4254 	void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4255 				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4256 	int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4257 			 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats);
4258 	void (*get_key_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4259 			    struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
4260 			    struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4261 	int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
4262 	int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
4263 	int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4264 		       struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4265 	int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4266 			  struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4267 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
4268 	void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4269 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4270 				struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4271 				struct dentry *dir);
4272 #endif
4273 	void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4274 			enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4275 	int (*sta_set_txpwr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4276 			     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4277 			     struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4278 	int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4279 			 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4280 			 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state,
4281 			 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state);
4282 	void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4283 				   struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4284 				   struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4285 	void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4286 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4287 			      struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4288 			      u32 changed);
4289 	void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4290 				    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4291 				    struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4292 	void (*sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4293 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4294 			       struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4295 			       struct station_info *sinfo);
4296 	int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4297 		       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4298 		       unsigned int link_id, u16 ac,
4299 		       const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params);
4300 	u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4301 	void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4302 			u64 tsf);
4303 	void (*offset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4304 			   s64 offset);
4305 	void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4306 	int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4307 
4308 	/**
4309 	 * @ampdu_action:
4310 	 * Perform a certain A-MPDU action.
4311 	 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want
4312 	 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through
4313 	 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
4314 	 * When the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL the driver
4315 	 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than @buf_size
4316 	 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the
4317 	 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be
4318 	 * possible with a buf_size of 8:
4319 	 *
4320 	 * - ``TX: 1.....7``
4321 	 * - ``RX:  2....7`` (lost frame #1)
4322 	 * - ``TX:        8..1...``
4323 	 *
4324 	 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the
4325 	 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be:
4326 	 *
4327 	 * - ``TX:        1   or``
4328 	 * - ``TX:        18  or``
4329 	 * - ``TX:        81``
4330 	 *
4331 	 * Even ``189`` would be wrong since 1 could be lost again.
4332 	 *
4333 	 * Returns a negative error code on failure. The driver may return
4334 	 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE for %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START
4335 	 * if the session can start immediately.
4336 	 *
4337 	 * The callback can sleep.
4338 	 */
4339 	int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4340 			    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4341 			    struct ieee80211_ampdu_params *params);
4342 	int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx,
4343 		struct survey_info *survey);
4344 	void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4345 	void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, s16 coverage_class);
4346 #ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE
4347 	int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4348 			    void *data, int len);
4349 	int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb,
4350 			     struct netlink_callback *cb,
4351 			     void *data, int len);
4352 #endif
4353 	void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4354 		      u32 queues, bool drop);
4355 	void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4356 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4357 			       struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
4358 	int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant);
4359 	int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant);
4360 
4361 	int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4362 				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4363 				 struct ieee80211_channel *chan,
4364 				 int duration,
4365 				 enum ieee80211_roc_type type);
4366 	int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4367 					struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4368 	int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx);
4369 	void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4370 			      u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max);
4371 	bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4372 	int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4373 				const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask);
4374 	void (*event_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4375 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4376 			       const struct ieee80211_event *event);
4377 
4378 	void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4379 				      struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4380 				      u16 tids, int num_frames,
4381 				      enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
4382 				      bool more_data);
4383 	void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4384 					struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4385 					u16 tids, int num_frames,
4386 					enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
4387 					bool more_data);
4388 
4389 	int	(*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4390 				     struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset);
4391 	void	(*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4392 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4393 				struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data);
4394 	void	(*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4395 				  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4396 				  u32 sset, u8 *data);
4397 
4398 	void	(*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4399 				  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4400 				  struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info *info);
4401 	void	(*mgd_complete_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4402 				   struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4403 				   struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info *info);
4404 
4405 	void	(*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4406 					     struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4407 
4408 	int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4409 			   struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4410 	void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4411 			       struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4412 	void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4413 			       struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx,
4414 			       u32 changed);
4415 	int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4416 				  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4417 				  struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf,
4418 				  struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4419 	void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4420 				     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4421 				     struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf,
4422 				     struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4423 	int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4424 				  struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs,
4425 				  int n_vifs,
4426 				  enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode);
4427 
4428 	void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4429 				  enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type);
4430 
4431 #if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6)
4432 	void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4433 				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4434 				 struct inet6_dev *idev);
4435 #endif
4436 	void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4437 				      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4438 				      struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
4439 	int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4440 				  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4441 				  struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
4442 
4443 	int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4444 				   struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4445 	void (*abort_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4446 				     struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4447 	void (*channel_switch_rx_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4448 					 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4449 					 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
4450 
4451 	int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4452 	void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4453 	u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4454 				       struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4455 	int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4456 			   int *dbm);
4457 
4458 	int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4459 				   struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4460 				   struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class,
4461 				   struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
4462 				   struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie);
4463 	void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4464 					   struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4465 					   struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4466 	void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4467 					 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4468 					 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params);
4469 
4470 	void (*wake_tx_queue)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4471 			      struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
4472 	void (*sync_rx_queues)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4473 
4474 	int (*start_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4475 			 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4476 			 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf);
4477 	int (*stop_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4478 			struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4479 	int (*nan_change_conf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4480 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4481 			       struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf, u32 changes);
4482 	int (*add_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4483 			    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4484 			    const struct cfg80211_nan_func *nan_func);
4485 	void (*del_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4486 			    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4487 			    u8 instance_id);
4488 	bool (*can_aggregate_in_amsdu)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4489 				       struct sk_buff *head,
4490 				       struct sk_buff *skb);
4491 	int (*get_ftm_responder_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4492 				       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4493 				       struct cfg80211_ftm_responder_stats *ftm_stats);
4494 	int (*start_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4495 			  struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request);
4496 	void (*abort_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4497 			   struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request);
4498 	int (*set_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4499 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4500 			      struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4501 			      struct cfg80211_tid_config *tid_conf);
4502 	int (*reset_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4503 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4504 				struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tids);
4505 	void (*update_vif_offload)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4506 				   struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4507 	void (*sta_set_4addr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4508 			      struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool enabled);
4509 	int (*set_sar_specs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4510 			     const struct cfg80211_sar_specs *sar);
4511 	void (*sta_set_decap_offload)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4512 				      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4513 				      struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool enabled);
4514 	void (*add_twt_setup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4515 			      struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4516 			      struct ieee80211_twt_setup *twt);
4517 	void (*twt_teardown_request)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4518 				     struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 flowid);
4519 	int (*set_radar_background)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4520 				    struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
4521 	int (*net_fill_forward_path)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4522 				     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4523 				     struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4524 				     struct net_device_path_ctx *ctx,
4525 				     struct net_device_path *path);
4526 	int (*change_vif_links)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4527 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4528 				u16 old_links, u16 new_links,
4529 				struct ieee80211_bss_conf *old[IEEE80211_MLD_MAX_NUM_LINKS]);
4530 	int (*change_sta_links)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4531 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4532 				struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4533 				u16 old_links, u16 new_links);
4534 
4535 	ANDROID_KABI_RESERVE(1);
4536 	ANDROID_KABI_RESERVE(2);
4537 	ANDROID_KABI_RESERVE(3);
4538 	ANDROID_KABI_RESERVE(4);
4539 };
4540 
4541 /**
4542  * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device
4543  *
4544  * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
4545  * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
4546  * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
4547  * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
4548  * @priv_data_len.
4549  *
4550  * @priv_data_len: length of private data
4551  * @ops: callbacks for this device
4552  * @requested_name: Requested name for this device.
4553  *	NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d)
4554  *
4555  * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
4556  */
4557 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len,
4558 					   const struct ieee80211_ops *ops,
4559 					   const char *requested_name);
4560 
4561 /**
4562  * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device
4563  *
4564  * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
4565  * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
4566  * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
4567  * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
4568  * @priv_data_len.
4569  *
4570  * @priv_data_len: length of private data
4571  * @ops: callbacks for this device
4572  *
4573  * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
4574  */
4575 static inline
ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,const struct ieee80211_ops * ops)4576 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,
4577 					const struct ieee80211_ops *ops)
4578 {
4579 	return ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL);
4580 }
4581 
4582 /**
4583  * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device
4584  *
4585  * You must call this function before any other functions in
4586  * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you
4587  * need to fill the contained wiphy's information.
4588  *
4589  * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4590  *
4591  * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise.
4592  */
4593 int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4594 
4595 /**
4596  * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description
4597  * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec
4598  * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds
4599  *	(full cycle, ie. one off + one on period)
4600  */
4601 struct ieee80211_tpt_blink {
4602 	int throughput;
4603 	int blink_time;
4604 };
4605 
4606 /**
4607  * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags
4608  * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio
4609  * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working
4610  * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one
4611  *	interface is connected in some way, including being an AP
4612  */
4613 enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags {
4614 	IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO		= BIT(0),
4615 	IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK		= BIT(1),
4616 	IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED	= BIT(2),
4617 };
4618 
4619 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4620 const char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4621 const char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4622 const char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4623 const char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4624 const char *
4625 __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4626 				   unsigned int flags,
4627 				   const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
4628 				   unsigned int blink_table_len);
4629 #endif
4630 /**
4631  * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED
4632  *
4633  * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4634  * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4635  * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4636  * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4637  *
4638  * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4639  *
4640  * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4641  */
ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw * hw)4642 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4643 {
4644 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4645 	return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw);
4646 #else
4647 	return NULL;
4648 #endif
4649 }
4650 
4651 /**
4652  * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED
4653  *
4654  * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4655  * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4656  * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4657  * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4658  *
4659  * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4660  *
4661  * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4662  */
ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw * hw)4663 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4664 {
4665 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4666 	return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw);
4667 #else
4668 	return NULL;
4669 #endif
4670 }
4671 
4672 /**
4673  * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED
4674  *
4675  * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4676  * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4677  * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4678  * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4679  *
4680  * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4681  *
4682  * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4683  */
ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw * hw)4684 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4685 {
4686 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4687 	return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw);
4688 #else
4689 	return NULL;
4690 #endif
4691 }
4692 
4693 /**
4694  * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED
4695  *
4696  * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4697  * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4698  * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4699  * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4700  *
4701  * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4702  *
4703  * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4704  */
ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw * hw)4705 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4706 {
4707 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4708 	return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw);
4709 #else
4710 	return NULL;
4711 #endif
4712 }
4713 
4714 /**
4715  * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger
4716  * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for
4717  * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags
4718  * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput
4719  * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table
4720  *
4721  * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are
4722  * configured) or the name of the new trigger.
4723  *
4724  * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw().
4725  */
4726 static inline const char *
ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,unsigned int flags,const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink * blink_table,unsigned int blink_table_len)4727 ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags,
4728 				 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
4729 				 unsigned int blink_table_len)
4730 {
4731 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4732 	return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table,
4733 						  blink_table_len);
4734 #else
4735 	return NULL;
4736 #endif
4737 }
4738 
4739 /**
4740  * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device
4741  *
4742  * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources
4743  * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem.
4744  *
4745  * @hw: the hardware to unregister
4746  */
4747 void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4748 
4749 /**
4750  * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor
4751  *
4752  * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the
4753  * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw()
4754  * before calling this function.
4755  *
4756  * @hw: the hardware to free
4757  */
4758 void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4759 
4760 /**
4761  * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely
4762  *
4763  * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason
4764  * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state
4765  * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware
4766  * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by
4767  * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all
4768  * internal state that it has prior to calling this function.
4769  *
4770  * @hw: the hardware to restart
4771  */
4772 void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4773 
4774 /**
4775  * ieee80211_rx_list - receive frame and store processed skbs in a list
4776  *
4777  * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4778  * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4779  * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4780  * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4781  * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4782  *
4783  * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4784  * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4785  * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4786  * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4787  * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4788  *
4789  * This function must be called with BHs disabled and RCU read lock
4790  *
4791  * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4792  * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL
4793  * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4794  * @list: the destination list
4795  */
4796 void ieee80211_rx_list(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4797 		       struct sk_buff *skb, struct list_head *list);
4798 
4799 /**
4800  * ieee80211_rx_napi - receive frame from NAPI context
4801  *
4802  * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4803  * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4804  * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4805  * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4806  * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4807  *
4808  * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4809  * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4810  * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4811  * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4812  * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4813  *
4814  * This function must be called with BHs disabled.
4815  *
4816  * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4817  * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL
4818  * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4819  * @napi: the NAPI context
4820  */
4821 void ieee80211_rx_napi(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4822 		       struct sk_buff *skb, struct napi_struct *napi);
4823 
4824 /**
4825  * ieee80211_rx - receive frame
4826  *
4827  * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4828  * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4829  * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4830  * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4831  * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4832  *
4833  * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4834  * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4835  * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4836  * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4837  * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4838  *
4839  * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni().
4840  *
4841  * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4842  * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4843  */
ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct sk_buff * skb)4844 static inline void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb)
4845 {
4846 	ieee80211_rx_napi(hw, NULL, skb, NULL);
4847 }
4848 
4849 /**
4850  * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame
4851  *
4852  * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context
4853  * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4854  *
4855  * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not
4856  * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with
4857  * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4858  *
4859  * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4860  * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4861  */
4862 void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
4863 
4864 /**
4865  * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context)
4866  *
4867  * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context
4868  * (internally disables bottom halves).
4869  *
4870  * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may
4871  * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4872  * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4873  *
4874  * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4875  * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4876  */
ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct sk_buff * skb)4877 static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4878 				   struct sk_buff *skb)
4879 {
4880 	local_bh_disable();
4881 	ieee80211_rx(hw, skb);
4882 	local_bh_enable();
4883 }
4884 
4885 /**
4886  * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta
4887  *
4888  * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS
4889  * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station
4890  * entering/leaving PS mode.
4891  *
4892  * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled.
4893  *
4894  * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against
4895  * each other.
4896  *
4897  * @sta: currently connected sta
4898  * @start: start or stop PS
4899  *
4900  * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set.
4901  */
4902 int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start);
4903 
4904 /**
4905  * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta
4906  *                                  (in process context)
4907  *
4908  * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context
4909  * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still
4910  * applies.
4911  *
4912  * @sta: currently connected sta
4913  * @start: start or stop PS
4914  *
4915  * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition().
4916  */
ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta * sta,bool start)4917 static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4918 						  bool start)
4919 {
4920 	int ret;
4921 
4922 	local_bh_disable();
4923 	ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start);
4924 	local_bh_enable();
4925 
4926 	return ret;
4927 }
4928 
4929 /**
4930  * ieee80211_sta_pspoll - PS-Poll frame received
4931  * @sta: currently connected station
4932  *
4933  * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4934  * use this function to inform mac80211 that a PS-Poll frame from a
4935  * connected station was received.
4936  * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4937  * and possibly ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(); calls to all three must
4938  * be serialized.
4939  */
4940 void ieee80211_sta_pspoll(struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4941 
4942 /**
4943  * ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger - (potential) U-APSD trigger frame received
4944  * @sta: currently connected station
4945  * @tid: TID of the received (potential) trigger frame
4946  *
4947  * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4948  * use this function to inform mac80211 that a (potential) trigger frame
4949  * from a connected station was received.
4950  * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4951  * and possibly ieee80211_sta_pspoll(); calls to all three must be
4952  * serialized.
4953  * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS can be passed as the tid if the tid is unknown.
4954  * In this case, mac80211 will not check that this tid maps to an AC
4955  * that is trigger enabled and assume that the caller did the proper
4956  * checks.
4957  */
4958 void ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
4959 
4960 /*
4961  * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions.
4962  * This is enough for the radiotap header.
4963  */
4964 #define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM	ALIGN(14, 4)
4965 
4966 /**
4967  * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames
4968  * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station
4969  * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames
4970  * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID
4971  *
4972  * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing
4973  * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need
4974  * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit.
4975  *
4976  * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are
4977  * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data
4978  * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim
4979  * call! Beware of the locking!)
4980  *
4981  * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD)
4982  * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are
4983  * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes
4984  * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data,
4985  * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered
4986  * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP).
4987  *
4988  * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per
4989  * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since
4990  * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the
4991  * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that
4992  * use this API.
4993  */
4994 void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4995 				u8 tid, bool buffered);
4996 
4997 /**
4998  * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet
4999  *
5000  * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support
5001  * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent
5002  * rate selection table for the station entry.
5003  *
5004  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5005  * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent.
5006  * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
5007  * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information
5008  * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch
5009  */
5010 void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5011 			    struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5012 			    struct sk_buff *skb,
5013 			    struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest,
5014 			    int max_rates);
5015 
5016 /**
5017  * ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput - set the expected tpt for a station
5018  *
5019  * Call this function to notify mac80211 about a change in expected throughput
5020  * to a station. A driver for a device that does rate control in firmware can
5021  * call this function when the expected throughput estimate towards a station
5022  * changes. The information is used to tune the CoDel AQM applied to traffic
5023  * going towards that station (which can otherwise be too aggressive and cause
5024  * slow stations to starve).
5025  *
5026  * @pubsta: the station to set throughput for.
5027  * @thr: the current expected throughput in kbps.
5028  */
5029 void ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
5030 					   u32 thr);
5031 
5032 /**
5033  * ieee80211_tx_rate_update - transmit rate update callback
5034  *
5035  * Drivers should call this functions with a non-NULL pub sta
5036  * This function can be used in drivers that does not have provision
5037  * in updating the tx rate in data path.
5038  *
5039  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
5040  * @pubsta: the station to update the tx rate for.
5041  * @info: tx status information
5042  */
5043 void ieee80211_tx_rate_update(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5044 			      struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
5045 			      struct ieee80211_tx_info *info);
5046 
5047 /**
5048  * ieee80211_tx_status - transmit status callback
5049  *
5050  * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been
5051  * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for
5052  * multicast frames but this can affect statistics.
5053  *
5054  * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
5055  * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls
5056  * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe()
5057  * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
5058  * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni().
5059  *
5060  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
5061  * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
5062  */
5063 void ieee80211_tx_status(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5064 			 struct sk_buff *skb);
5065 
5066 /**
5067  * ieee80211_tx_status_ext - extended transmit status callback
5068  *
5069  * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
5070  * in drivers that may want to provide extra information that does not
5071  * fit into &struct ieee80211_tx_info.
5072  *
5073  * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
5074  * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
5075  * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
5076  *
5077  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
5078  * @status: tx status information
5079  */
5080 void ieee80211_tx_status_ext(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5081 			     struct ieee80211_tx_status *status);
5082 
5083 /**
5084  * ieee80211_tx_status_noskb - transmit status callback without skb
5085  *
5086  * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
5087  * in drivers that cannot reliably map tx status information back to
5088  * specific skbs.
5089  *
5090  * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
5091  * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
5092  * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
5093  *
5094  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
5095  * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent
5096  *	(NULL for multicast packets)
5097  * @info: tx status information
5098  */
ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct ieee80211_sta * sta,struct ieee80211_tx_info * info)5099 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5100 					     struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5101 					     struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
5102 {
5103 	struct ieee80211_tx_status status = {
5104 		.sta = sta,
5105 		.info = info,
5106 	};
5107 
5108 	ieee80211_tx_status_ext(hw, &status);
5109 }
5110 
5111 /**
5112  * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context)
5113  *
5114  * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in process context.
5115  *
5116  * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
5117  * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed
5118  * for a single hardware.
5119  *
5120  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
5121  * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
5122  */
ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct sk_buff * skb)5123 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5124 					  struct sk_buff *skb)
5125 {
5126 	local_bh_disable();
5127 	ieee80211_tx_status(hw, skb);
5128 	local_bh_enable();
5129 }
5130 
5131 /**
5132  * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback
5133  *
5134  * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in IRQ context
5135  * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
5136  *
5137  * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
5138  * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
5139  *
5140  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
5141  * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
5142  */
5143 void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5144 				 struct sk_buff *skb);
5145 
5146 /**
5147  * ieee80211_tx_status_8023 - transmit status callback for 802.3 frame format
5148  *
5149  * Call this function for all transmitted data frames after their transmit
5150  * completion. This callback should only be called for data frames which
5151  * are using driver's (or hardware's) offload capability of encap/decap
5152  * 802.11 frames.
5153  *
5154  * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
5155  * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other and all
5156  * calls in the same tx status family.
5157  *
5158  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
5159  * @vif: the interface for which the frame was transmitted
5160  * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
5161  */
5162 void ieee80211_tx_status_8023(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5163 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5164 			       struct sk_buff *skb);
5165 
5166 /**
5167  * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station
5168  *
5169  * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding
5170  * connected STA.
5171  *
5172  * @sta: the non-responding connected sta
5173  * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response
5174  */
5175 void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets);
5176 
5177 #define IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM 2
5178 
5179 /**
5180  * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets
5181  * @tim_offset: position of TIM element
5182  * @tim_length: size of TIM element
5183  * @cntdwn_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM offsets
5184  *	to countdown counters.  This array can contain zero values which
5185  *	should be ignored.
5186  * @mbssid_off: position of the multiple bssid element
5187  */
5188 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets {
5189 	u16 tim_offset;
5190 	u16 tim_length;
5191 
5192 	u16 cntdwn_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM];
5193 	u16 mbssid_off;
5194 };
5195 
5196 /**
5197  * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function
5198  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5199  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5200  * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will
5201  *	receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver.
5202  * @link_id: the link id to which the beacon belongs (or 0 for a non-MLD AP)
5203  *
5204  * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
5205  * obtain the beacon template.
5206  *
5207  * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the
5208  * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template
5209  * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when
5210  * applicable, the CSA count.
5211  *
5212  * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
5213  *
5214  * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
5215  */
5216 struct sk_buff *
5217 ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5218 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5219 			      struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs,
5220 			      unsigned int link_id);
5221 
5222 /**
5223  * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function
5224  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5225  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5226  * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset.
5227  *	Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
5228  * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length,
5229  *	(including the ID and length bytes!).
5230  *	Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
5231  * @link_id: the link id to which the beacon belongs (or 0 for a non-MLD AP)
5232  *
5233  * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
5234  * obtain the beacon frame.
5235  *
5236  * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
5237  * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon
5238  * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly
5239  * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt).
5240  *
5241  * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
5242  *
5243  * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
5244  */
5245 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5246 					 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5247 					 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length,
5248 					 unsigned int link_id);
5249 
5250 /**
5251  * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function
5252  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5253  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5254  * @link_id: the link id to which the beacon belongs (or 0 for a non-MLD AP)
5255  *
5256  * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
5257  *
5258  * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
5259  */
ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct ieee80211_vif * vif,unsigned int link_id)5260 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5261 						   struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5262 						   unsigned int link_id)
5263 {
5264 	return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL, link_id);
5265 }
5266 
5267 /**
5268  * ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn - request mac80211 to decrement the beacon countdown
5269  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5270  *
5271  * The beacon counter should be updated after each beacon transmission.
5272  * This function is called implicitly when
5273  * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the
5274  * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this
5275  * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's beacon countdown.
5276  *
5277  * Return: new countdown value
5278  */
5279 u8 ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5280 
5281 /**
5282  * ieee80211_beacon_set_cntdwn - request mac80211 to set beacon countdown
5283  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5284  * @counter: the new value for the counter
5285  *
5286  * The beacon countdown can be changed by the device, this API should be
5287  * used by the device driver to update csa counter in mac80211.
5288  *
5289  * It should never be used together with ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn(),
5290  * as it will cause a race condition around the counter value.
5291  */
5292 void ieee80211_beacon_set_cntdwn(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 counter);
5293 
5294 /**
5295  * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch
5296  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5297  *
5298  * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
5299  * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
5300  * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed.
5301  */
5302 void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5303 
5304 /**
5305  * ieee80211_beacon_cntdwn_is_complete - find out if countdown reached 1
5306  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5307  *
5308  * This function returns whether the countdown reached zero.
5309  */
5310 bool ieee80211_beacon_cntdwn_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5311 
5312 /**
5313  * ieee80211_color_change_finish - notify mac80211 about color change
5314  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5315  *
5316  * After a color change announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
5317  * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
5318  * notify mac80211 that the color can be changed
5319  */
5320 void ieee80211_color_change_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5321 
5322 /**
5323  * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template
5324  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5325  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5326  *
5327  * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to
5328  * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller.
5329  *
5330  * Can only be called in AP mode.
5331  *
5332  * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error.
5333  */
5334 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5335 					struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5336 
5337 /**
5338  * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template
5339  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5340  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5341  *
5342  * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to
5343  * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
5344  * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used.
5345  *
5346  * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
5347  * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit.
5348  *
5349  * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error.
5350  */
5351 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5352 				     struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5353 
5354 /**
5355  * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template
5356  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5357  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5358  * @link_id: If the vif is an MLD, get a frame with the link addresses
5359  *	for the given link ID. For a link_id < 0 you get a frame with
5360  *	MLD addresses, however useful that might be.
5361  * @qos_ok: QoS NDP is acceptable to the caller, this should be set
5362  *	if at all possible
5363  *
5364  * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to
5365  * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
5366  * BSSID and address is used.
5367  *
5368  * If @qos_ndp is set and the association is to an AP with QoS/WMM, the
5369  * returned packet will be QoS NDP.
5370  *
5371  * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
5372  * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields.
5373  *
5374  * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error.
5375  */
5376 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5377 				       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5378 				       int link_id, bool qos_ok);
5379 
5380 /**
5381  * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
5382  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5383  * @src_addr: source MAC address
5384  * @ssid: SSID buffer
5385  * @ssid_len: length of SSID
5386  * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs
5387  *
5388  * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
5389  * hardware.
5390  *
5391  * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
5392  */
5393 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5394 				       const u8 *src_addr,
5395 				       const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len,
5396 				       size_t tailroom);
5397 
5398 /**
5399  * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function
5400  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5401  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5402  * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
5403  * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
5404  * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
5405  * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame.
5406  *
5407  * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
5408  * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
5409  * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
5410  * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed.
5411  */
5412 void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5413 		       const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
5414 		       const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
5415 		       struct ieee80211_rts *rts);
5416 
5417 /**
5418  * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame
5419  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5420  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5421  * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
5422  * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
5423  *
5424  * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
5425  * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
5426  * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
5427  *
5428  * Return: The duration.
5429  */
5430 __le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5431 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len,
5432 			      const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
5433 
5434 /**
5435  * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function
5436  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5437  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5438  * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
5439  * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
5440  * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
5441  * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame.
5442  *
5443  * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
5444  * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
5445  * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
5446  * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed.
5447  */
5448 void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5449 			     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5450 			     const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
5451 			     const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
5452 			     struct ieee80211_cts *cts);
5453 
5454 /**
5455  * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame
5456  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5457  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5458  * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
5459  * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
5460  *
5461  * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
5462  * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
5463  * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
5464  *
5465  * Return: The duration.
5466  */
5467 __le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5468 				    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5469 				    size_t frame_len,
5470 				    const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
5471 
5472 /**
5473  * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame
5474  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5475  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5476  * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on
5477  * @frame_len: the length of the frame.
5478  * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted.
5479  *
5480  * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its
5481  * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps).
5482  *
5483  * Return: The duration.
5484  */
5485 __le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5486 					struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5487 					enum nl80211_band band,
5488 					size_t frame_len,
5489 					struct ieee80211_rate *rate);
5490 
5491 /**
5492  * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames
5493  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5494  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5495  *
5496  * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If
5497  * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast
5498  * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host
5499  * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered
5500  * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame.
5501  *
5502  * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered
5503  * frames are available.
5504  *
5505  * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was
5506  * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus
5507  * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns
5508  * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver
5509  * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to
5510  * use common code for all beacons.
5511  */
5512 struct sk_buff *
5513 ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5514 
5515 /**
5516  * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32
5517  *
5518  * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32.
5519  *
5520  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5521  * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
5522  * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
5523  */
5524 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5525 			       u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
5526 
5527 /**
5528  * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key
5529  *
5530  * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken
5531  * from the given packet.
5532  *
5533  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5534  * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted
5535  *	with this P1K
5536  * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
5537  */
ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf * keyconf,struct sk_buff * skb,u16 * p1k)5538 static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5539 					  struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k)
5540 {
5541 	struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data;
5542 	const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control);
5543 	u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]);
5544 
5545 	ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k);
5546 }
5547 
5548 /**
5549  * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX
5550  *
5551  * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32
5552  * and transmitter address.
5553  *
5554  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5555  * @ta: TA that will be used with the key
5556  * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
5557  * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
5558  */
5559 void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5560 			       const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
5561 
5562 /**
5563  * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key
5564  *
5565  * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values
5566  * in the packet.
5567  *
5568  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5569  * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be
5570  *	encrypted with this key
5571  * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes
5572  */
5573 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5574 			    struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k);
5575 
5576 /**
5577  * ieee80211_tkip_add_iv - write TKIP IV and Ext. IV to pos
5578  *
5579  * @pos: start of crypto header
5580  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5581  * @pn: PN to add
5582  *
5583  * Returns: pointer to the octet following IVs (i.e. beginning of
5584  * the packet payload)
5585  *
5586  * This function writes the tkip IV value to pos (which should
5587  * point to the crypto header)
5588  */
5589 u8 *ieee80211_tkip_add_iv(u8 *pos, struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, u64 pn);
5590 
5591 /**
5592  * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter
5593  *
5594  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5595  * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
5596  *	the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
5597  *	CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
5598  * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
5599  *
5600  * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs
5601  * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done
5602  * by the device and not by mac80211.
5603  *
5604  * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
5605  * can be done concurrently.
5606  */
5607 void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5608 			      int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
5609 
5610 /**
5611  * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter
5612  *
5613  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5614  * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
5615  *	the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
5616  *	CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
5617  * @seq: new sequence data
5618  *
5619  * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the
5620  * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK
5621  * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called
5622  * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211.
5623  *
5624  * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
5625  * can be done concurrently.
5626  */
5627 void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5628 			      int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
5629 
5630 /**
5631  * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key
5632  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5633  *
5634  * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the
5635  * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but
5636  * instead assumed to have been removed already.
5637  *
5638  * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently)
5639  * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().)
5640  */
5641 void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5642 
5643 /**
5644  * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN
5645  * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on
5646  * @keyconf: new key data
5647  *
5648  * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new
5649  * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper
5650  * RX processing, so this function allows setting them.
5651  *
5652  * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will
5653  * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to
5654  * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an
5655  * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc.
5656  *
5657  * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware
5658  * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK
5659  * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver
5660  * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses
5661  * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part
5662  * of the reconfiguration.
5663  *
5664  * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq()
5665  * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly.
5666  *
5667  * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware,
5668  * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases
5669  * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for
5670  * the key that's being replaced.
5671  */
5672 struct ieee80211_key_conf *
5673 ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5674 			struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5675 
5676 /**
5677  * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying
5678  * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on
5679  * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association
5680  * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying
5681  * @gfp: allocation flags
5682  */
5683 void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid,
5684 				const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp);
5685 
5686 /**
5687  * ieee80211_key_mic_failure - increment MIC failure counter for the key
5688  *
5689  * Note: this is really only safe if no other RX function is called
5690  * at the same time.
5691  *
5692  * @keyconf: the key in question
5693  */
5694 void ieee80211_key_mic_failure(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5695 
5696 /**
5697  * ieee80211_key_replay - increment replay counter for the key
5698  *
5699  * Note: this is really only safe if no other RX function is called
5700  * at the same time.
5701  *
5702  * @keyconf: the key in question
5703  */
5704 void ieee80211_key_replay(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5705 
5706 /**
5707  * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue
5708  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5709  * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5710  *
5711  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
5712  */
5713 void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5714 
5715 /**
5716  * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue
5717  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5718  * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5719  *
5720  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5721  */
5722 void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5723 
5724 /**
5725  * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue
5726  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5727  * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5728  *
5729  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5730  *
5731  * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise.
5732  */
5733 
5734 int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5735 
5736 /**
5737  * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues
5738  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5739  *
5740  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5741  */
5742 void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5743 
5744 /**
5745  * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues
5746  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5747  *
5748  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
5749  */
5750 void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5751 
5752 /**
5753  * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan
5754  *
5755  * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is
5756  * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify
5757  * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from
5758  * any context, including hardirq context.
5759  *
5760  * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan
5761  * @info: information about the completed scan
5762  */
5763 void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5764 			      struct cfg80211_scan_info *info);
5765 
5766 /**
5767  * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan
5768  *
5769  * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the
5770  * driver whenever there are new scan results available.
5771  *
5772  * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
5773  */
5774 void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5775 
5776 /**
5777  * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped
5778  *
5779  * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by
5780  * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task.
5781  * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan
5782  * while associating, for instance.
5783  *
5784  * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
5785  */
5786 void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5787 
5788 /**
5789  * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags
5790  * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have
5791  *	been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware
5792  *	reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new
5793  *	interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they
5794  *	haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
5795  * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all
5796  *	interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
5797  * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE: Iterate only active interfaces (netdev is up).
5798  * @IEEE80211_IFACE_SKIP_SDATA_NOT_IN_DRIVER: Skip any interfaces where SDATA
5799  *	is not in the driver.  This may fix crashes during firmware recovery
5800  *	for instance.
5801  */
5802 enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags {
5803 	IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL	= 0,
5804 	IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL	= BIT(0),
5805 	IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE	= BIT(1),
5806 	IEEE80211_IFACE_SKIP_SDATA_NOT_IN_DRIVER	= BIT(2),
5807 };
5808 
5809 /**
5810  * ieee80211_iterate_interfaces - iterate interfaces
5811  *
5812  * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5813  * hardware and calls the callback for them. This includes active as well as
5814  * inactive interfaces. This function allows the iterator function to sleep.
5815  * Will iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5816  *
5817  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5818  * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5819  * @iterator: the iterator function to call
5820  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5821  */
5822 void ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
5823 				  void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
5824 						   struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5825 				  void *data);
5826 
5827 /**
5828  * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces
5829  *
5830  * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5831  * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5832  * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator
5833  * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can
5834  * be used.
5835  * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5836  *
5837  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5838  * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5839  * @iterator: the iterator function to call
5840  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5841  */
5842 static inline void
ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,u32 iter_flags,void (* iterator)(void * data,u8 * mac,struct ieee80211_vif * vif),void * data)5843 ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
5844 				    void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
5845 						     struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5846 				    void *data)
5847 {
5848 	ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw,
5849 				     iter_flags | IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE,
5850 				     iterator, data);
5851 }
5852 
5853 /**
5854  * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces
5855  *
5856  * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5857  * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5858  * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
5859  * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead.
5860  * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5861  *
5862  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5863  * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5864  * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5865  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5866  */
5867 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5868 						u32 iter_flags,
5869 						void (*iterator)(void *data,
5870 						    u8 *mac,
5871 						    struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5872 						void *data);
5873 
5874 /**
5875  * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_mtx - iterate active interfaces
5876  *
5877  * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5878  * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5879  * This version can only be used while holding the wiphy mutex.
5880  * The driver must not call this with a lock held that it can also take in
5881  * response to callbacks from mac80211, and it must not call this within
5882  * callbacks made by mac80211 - both would result in deadlocks.
5883  *
5884  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5885  * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5886  * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5887  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5888  */
5889 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_mtx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5890 					     u32 iter_flags,
5891 					     void (*iterator)(void *data,
5892 						u8 *mac,
5893 						struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5894 					     void *data);
5895 
5896 /**
5897  * ieee80211_iterate_stations - iterate stations
5898  *
5899  * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given
5900  * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback
5901  * function for them.
5902  * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator
5903  * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic can be used.
5904  *
5905  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5906  * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5907  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5908  */
5909 void ieee80211_iterate_stations(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5910 				void (*iterator)(void *data,
5911 						 struct ieee80211_sta *sta),
5912 				void *data);
5913 
5914 /**
5915  * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations
5916  *
5917  * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given
5918  * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback
5919  * function for them.
5920  * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
5921  *
5922  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5923  * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5924  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5925  */
5926 void ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5927 				       void (*iterator)(void *data,
5928 						struct ieee80211_sta *sta),
5929 				       void *data);
5930 /**
5931  * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
5932  *
5933  * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue.
5934  * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be.
5935  *
5936  * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
5937  * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue
5938  */
5939 void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work);
5940 
5941 /**
5942  * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
5943  *
5944  * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211
5945  * workqueue.
5946  *
5947  * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
5948  * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue
5949  * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing
5950  */
5951 void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5952 				  struct delayed_work *dwork,
5953 				  unsigned long delay);
5954 
5955 /**
5956  * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session.
5957  * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session
5958  * @tid: the TID to BA on.
5959  * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs)
5960  *
5961  * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise
5962  *
5963  * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
5964  * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
5965  * will be managed by the mac80211.
5966  */
5967 int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid,
5968 				  u16 timeout);
5969 
5970 /**
5971  * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate.
5972  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5973  * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
5974  * @tid: the TID to BA on.
5975  *
5976  * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
5977  * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called
5978  * from any context.
5979  */
5980 void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
5981 				      u16 tid);
5982 
5983 /**
5984  * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session.
5985  * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop
5986  * @tid: the TID to stop BA.
5987  *
5988  * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active
5989  *
5990  * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
5991  * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
5992  * will be managed by the mac80211.
5993  */
5994 int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid);
5995 
5996 /**
5997  * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate.
5998  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5999  * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
6000  * @tid: the desired TID to BA on.
6001  *
6002  * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
6003  * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It
6004  * can be called from any context.
6005  */
6006 void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
6007 				     u16 tid);
6008 
6009 /**
6010  * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station
6011  *
6012  * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on
6013  * @addr: station's address
6014  *
6015  * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
6016  *
6017  * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
6018  * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
6019  */
6020 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6021 					 const u8 *addr);
6022 
6023 /**
6024  * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware
6025  *
6026  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6027  * @addr: remote station's address
6028  * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'.
6029  *
6030  * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
6031  *
6032  * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
6033  * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
6034  *
6035  * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get
6036  *      the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'.
6037  *      We can have multiple STA associated with multiple
6038  *      logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another
6039  *      BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first).
6040  *      In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL
6041  *      is not reliable.
6042  *
6043  * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible.
6044  */
6045 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6046 					       const u8 *addr,
6047 					       const u8 *localaddr);
6048 
6049 /**
6050  * ieee80211_find_sta_by_link_addrs - find STA by link addresses
6051  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6052  * @addr: remote station's link address
6053  * @localaddr: local link address, use %NULL for any (but avoid that)
6054  * @link_id: pointer to obtain the link ID if the STA is found,
6055  *	may be %NULL if the link ID is not needed
6056  *
6057  * Obtain the STA by link address, must use RCU protection.
6058  */
6059 struct ieee80211_sta *
6060 ieee80211_find_sta_by_link_addrs(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6061 				 const u8 *addr,
6062 				 const u8 *localaddr,
6063 				 unsigned int *link_id);
6064 
6065 /**
6066  * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up
6067  * @hw: the hardware
6068  * @pubsta: the station
6069  * @block: whether to block or unblock
6070  *
6071  * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues
6072  * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before
6073  * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be
6074  * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected
6075  * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag.
6076  *
6077  * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free
6078  * manner.
6079  *
6080  * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames
6081  * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not
6082  * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call
6083  * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to
6084  * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the
6085  * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must
6086  * call this function again to unblock the station. That will
6087  * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if
6088  * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also
6089  * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver
6090  * will be notified that the station woke up some time after
6091  * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually
6092  * woke up while blocked or not.
6093  */
6094 void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6095 			       struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block);
6096 
6097 /**
6098  * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP
6099  * @pubsta: the station
6100  *
6101  * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell
6102  * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the
6103  * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead.
6104  * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD.
6105  *
6106  * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must
6107  * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function
6108  * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or
6109  * all non-irqsafe, don't mix!
6110  *
6111  * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no
6112  *     driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if
6113  *     you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history
6114  *     and restore the _irqsafe version!
6115  */
6116 void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
6117 
6118 /**
6119  * ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc - ask mac80211 to send NDP with EOSP
6120  * @pubsta: the station
6121  * @tid: the tid of the NDP
6122  *
6123  * Sometimes the device understands that it needs to close
6124  * the Service Period unexpectedly. This can happen when
6125  * sending frames that are filling holes in the BA window.
6126  * In this case, the device can ask mac80211 to send a
6127  * Nullfunc frame with EOSP set. When that happens, the
6128  * driver must have called ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() to
6129  * let mac80211 know that there are no buffered frames any
6130  * more, otherwise mac80211 will get the more_data bit wrong.
6131  * The low level driver must have made sure that the frame
6132  * will be sent despite the station being in power-save.
6133  * Mac80211 won't call allow_buffered_frames().
6134  * Note that calling this function, doesn't exempt the driver
6135  * from closing the EOSP properly, it will still have to call
6136  * ieee80211_sta_eosp when the NDP is sent.
6137  */
6138 void ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, int tid);
6139 
6140 /**
6141  * ieee80211_sta_recalc_aggregates - recalculate aggregate data after a change
6142  * @pubsta: the station
6143  *
6144  * Call this function after changing a per-link aggregate data as referenced in
6145  * &struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates by accessing the agg field of
6146  * &struct ieee80211_link_sta.
6147  *
6148  * With non MLO the data in deflink will be referenced directly. In that case
6149  * there is no need to call this function.
6150  */
6151 void ieee80211_sta_recalc_aggregates(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
6152 
6153 /**
6154  * ieee80211_sta_register_airtime - register airtime usage for a sta/tid
6155  *
6156  * Register airtime usage for a given sta on a given tid. The driver must call
6157  * this function to notify mac80211 that a station used a certain amount of
6158  * airtime. This information will be used by the TXQ scheduler to schedule
6159  * stations in a way that ensures airtime fairness.
6160  *
6161  * The reported airtime should as a minimum include all time that is spent
6162  * transmitting to the remote station, including overhead and padding, but not
6163  * including time spent waiting for a TXOP. If the time is not reported by the
6164  * hardware it can in some cases be calculated from the rate and known frame
6165  * composition. When possible, the time should include any failed transmission
6166  * attempts.
6167  *
6168  * The driver can either call this function synchronously for every packet or
6169  * aggregate, or asynchronously as airtime usage information becomes available.
6170  * TX and RX airtime can be reported together, or separately by setting one of
6171  * them to 0.
6172  *
6173  * @pubsta: the station
6174  * @tid: the TID to register airtime for
6175  * @tx_airtime: airtime used during TX (in usec)
6176  * @rx_airtime: airtime used during RX (in usec)
6177  */
6178 void ieee80211_sta_register_airtime(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
6179 				    u32 tx_airtime, u32 rx_airtime);
6180 
6181 /**
6182  * ieee80211_txq_airtime_check - check if a txq can send frame to device
6183  *
6184  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6185  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6186  *
6187  * Return true if the AQL's airtime limit has not been reached and the txq can
6188  * continue to send more packets to the device. Otherwise return false.
6189  */
6190 bool
6191 ieee80211_txq_airtime_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
6192 
6193 /**
6194  * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device
6195  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6196  * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
6197  * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
6198  * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
6199  *
6200  * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
6201  * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
6202  * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device
6203  * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due
6204  * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few
6205  * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep.
6206  *
6207  * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order
6208  * in which they were originally installed and handed to the
6209  * set_key callback.
6210  */
6211 void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6212 			 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6213 			 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6214 				      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6215 				      struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
6216 				      struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
6217 				      void *data),
6218 			 void *iter_data);
6219 
6220 /**
6221  * ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu - iterate keys programmed into the device
6222  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6223  * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
6224  * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
6225  * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
6226  *
6227  * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
6228  * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
6229  * the device. Note that due to locking reasons, keys of station
6230  * in removal process will be skipped.
6231  *
6232  * This function requires being called in an RCU critical section,
6233  * and thus iter must be atomic.
6234  */
6235 void ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6236 			     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6237 			     void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6238 					  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6239 					  struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
6240 					  struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
6241 					  void *data),
6242 			     void *iter_data);
6243 
6244 /**
6245  * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts
6246  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
6247  * @iter: iterator function
6248  * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function
6249  *
6250  * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and
6251  * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other
6252  * places while calling into the driver.
6253  *
6254  * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during
6255  * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being
6256  * removed.
6257  *
6258  * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed
6259  * before the restart are considered already present so will be
6260  * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already
6261  * or not.
6262  */
6263 void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic(
6264 	struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6265 	void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6266 		     struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf,
6267 		     void *data),
6268 	void *iter_data);
6269 
6270 /**
6271  * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
6272  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
6273  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6274  *
6275  * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
6276  * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate
6277  * information. This function must only be called from within the
6278  * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function
6279  * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return
6280  * %NULL.
6281  *
6282  * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
6283  */
6284 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6285 					  struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6286 
6287 /**
6288  * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons
6289  *
6290  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6291  *
6292  * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and
6293  * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the
6294  * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function.
6295  */
6296 void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6297 
6298 /**
6299  * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP
6300  *
6301  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6302  *
6303  * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and
6304  * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver
6305  * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost.
6306  * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated
6307  * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set.
6308  *
6309  * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state,
6310  * without connection recovery attempts.
6311  */
6312 void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6313 
6314 /**
6315  * ieee80211_disconnect - request disconnection
6316  *
6317  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6318  * @reconnect: immediate reconnect is desired
6319  *
6320  * Request disconnection from the current network and, if enabled, send a
6321  * hint to the higher layers that immediate reconnect is desired.
6322  */
6323 void ieee80211_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool reconnect);
6324 
6325 /**
6326  * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume
6327  *
6328  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6329  *
6330  * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume.
6331  * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the
6332  * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were
6333  * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or
6334  * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume.
6335  *
6336  * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses
6337  * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface
6338  * will still be added as associated first during resume and then
6339  * disconnect normally later.
6340  *
6341  * This function can only be called from the resume callback and
6342  * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it
6343  * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the
6344  * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto).
6345  */
6346 void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6347 
6348 /**
6349  * ieee80211_hw_restart_disconnect - disconnect from AP after
6350  * hardware restart
6351  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6352  *
6353  * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after
6354  * hardware restart.
6355  */
6356 void ieee80211_hw_restart_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6357 
6358 /**
6359  * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring
6360  *	rssi threshold triggered
6361  *
6362  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6363  * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type
6364  * @rssi_level: new RSSI level value or 0 if not available
6365  * @gfp: context flags
6366  *
6367  * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality
6368  * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform
6369  * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold.
6370  */
6371 void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6372 			       enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event,
6373 			       s32 rssi_level,
6374 			       gfp_t gfp);
6375 
6376 /**
6377  * ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify - inform CQM of beacon loss
6378  *
6379  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6380  * @gfp: context flags
6381  */
6382 void ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, gfp_t gfp);
6383 
6384 /**
6385  * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected
6386  *
6387  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6388  */
6389 void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
6390 
6391 /**
6392  * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process
6393  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6394  * @success: make the channel switch successful or not
6395  *
6396  * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel
6397  * and wake up the suspended queues.
6398  */
6399 void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success);
6400 
6401 /**
6402  * ieee80211_channel_switch_disconnect - disconnect due to channel switch error
6403  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6404  * @block_tx: if %true, do not send deauth frame.
6405  *
6406  * Instruct mac80211 to disconnect due to a channel switch error. The channel
6407  * switch can request to block the tx and so, we need to make sure we do not send
6408  * a deauth frame in this case.
6409  */
6410 void ieee80211_channel_switch_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6411 					 bool block_tx);
6412 
6413 /**
6414  * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition
6415  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6416  * @link_id: link ID for MLO, or 0
6417  * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode
6418  *
6419  * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed
6420  * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than
6421  * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth.
6422  */
6423 void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, unsigned int link_id,
6424 			    enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode);
6425 
6426 /**
6427  * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start
6428  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6429  */
6430 void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
6431 
6432 /**
6433  * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired
6434  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6435  */
6436 void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
6437 
6438 /**
6439  * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions
6440  *
6441  * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device
6442  * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba
6443  * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs
6444  * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)."
6445  * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and
6446  * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation.
6447  *
6448  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6449  * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid
6450  * @addr: & to bssid mac address
6451  */
6452 void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap,
6453 				  const u8 *addr);
6454 
6455 /**
6456  * ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames - move RX BA window and mark filtered
6457  * @pubsta: station struct
6458  * @tid: the session's TID
6459  * @ssn: starting sequence number of the bitmap, all frames before this are
6460  *	assumed to be out of the window after the call
6461  * @filtered: bitmap of filtered frames, BIT(0) is the @ssn entry etc.
6462  * @received_mpdus: number of received mpdus in firmware
6463  *
6464  * This function moves the BA window and releases all frames before @ssn, and
6465  * marks frames marked in the bitmap as having been filtered. Afterwards, it
6466  * checks if any frames in the window starting from @ssn can now be released
6467  * (in case they were only waiting for frames that were filtered.)
6468  * (Only work correctly if @max_rx_aggregation_subframes <= 64 frames)
6469  */
6470 void ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
6471 					  u16 ssn, u64 filtered,
6472 					  u16 received_mpdus);
6473 
6474 /**
6475  * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame
6476  *
6477  * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder
6478  * buffer.
6479  *
6480  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6481  * @ra: the peer's destination address
6482  * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session
6483  * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver
6484  */
6485 void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn);
6486 
6487 /**
6488  * ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl - helper to queue an RX BA work
6489  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
6490  * @addr: station mac address
6491  * @tid: the rx tid
6492  */
6493 void ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *addr,
6494 				 unsigned int tid);
6495 
6496 /**
6497  * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session
6498  *
6499  * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
6500  * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
6501  * reordering.
6502  *
6503  * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
6504  * when they complete AddBa negotiation.
6505  *
6506  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
6507  * @addr: station mac address
6508  * @tid: the rx tid
6509  */
ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif * vif,const u8 * addr,u16 tid)6510 static inline void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6511 						      const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
6512 {
6513 	if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
6514 		return;
6515 	ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid);
6516 }
6517 
6518 /**
6519  * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session
6520  *
6521  * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
6522  * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
6523  * reordering.
6524  *
6525  * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
6526  * when they complete DelBa negotiation.
6527  *
6528  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
6529  * @addr: station mac address
6530  * @tid: the rx tid
6531  */
ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif * vif,const u8 * addr,u16 tid)6532 static inline void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6533 						     const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
6534 {
6535 	if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
6536 		return;
6537 	ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid + IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS);
6538 }
6539 
6540 /**
6541  * ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired - stop a Rx BA session due to timeout
6542  *
6543  * Some device drivers do not offload AddBa/DelBa negotiation, but handle rx
6544  * buffer reording internally, and therefore also handle the session timer.
6545  *
6546  * Trigger the timeout flow, which sends a DelBa.
6547  *
6548  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
6549  * @addr: station mac address
6550  * @tid: the rx tid
6551  */
6552 void ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6553 				   const u8 *addr, unsigned int tid);
6554 
6555 /* Rate control API */
6556 
6557 /**
6558  * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo
6559  *
6560  * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for.
6561  * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on.
6562  * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration
6563  * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs
6564  *	to be filled in
6565  * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate
6566  *	which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and
6567  *	used for rate calculations in the mesh network.
6568  * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the
6569  *	RTS threshold
6570  * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission
6571  *	if the selected rate supports it
6572  * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask
6573  * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use)
6574  * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode
6575  */
6576 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control {
6577 	struct ieee80211_hw *hw;
6578 	struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband;
6579 	struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf;
6580 	struct sk_buff *skb;
6581 	struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate;
6582 	bool rts, short_preamble;
6583 	u32 rate_idx_mask;
6584 	u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask;
6585 	bool bss;
6586 };
6587 
6588 /**
6589  * enum rate_control_capabilities - rate control capabilities
6590  */
6591 enum rate_control_capabilities {
6592 	/**
6593 	 * @RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW:
6594 	 * Support for extended NSS BW support (dot11VHTExtendedNSSCapable)
6595 	 * Note that this is only looked at if the minimum number of chains
6596 	 * that the AP uses is < the number of TX chains the hardware has,
6597 	 * otherwise the NSS difference doesn't bother us.
6598 	 */
6599 	RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW = BIT(0),
6600 	/**
6601 	 * @RATE_CTRL_CAPA_AMPDU_TRIGGER:
6602 	 * mac80211 should start A-MPDU sessions on tx
6603 	 */
6604 	RATE_CTRL_CAPA_AMPDU_TRIGGER = BIT(1),
6605 };
6606 
6607 struct rate_control_ops {
6608 	unsigned long capa;
6609 	const char *name;
6610 	void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
6611 	void (*add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, void *priv,
6612 			    struct dentry *debugfsdir);
6613 	void (*free)(void *priv);
6614 
6615 	void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp);
6616 	void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6617 			  struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
6618 			  struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta);
6619 	void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6620 			    struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
6621 			    struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
6622 			    u32 changed);
6623 	void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
6624 			 void *priv_sta);
6625 
6626 	void (*tx_status_ext)(void *priv,
6627 			      struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6628 			      void *priv_sta, struct ieee80211_tx_status *st);
6629 	void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6630 			  struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
6631 			  struct sk_buff *skb);
6632 	void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
6633 			 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
6634 
6635 	void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta,
6636 				struct dentry *dir);
6637 
6638 	u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta);
6639 
6640 	ANDROID_KABI_RESERVE(1);
6641 	ANDROID_KABI_RESERVE(2);
6642 	ANDROID_KABI_RESERVE(3);
6643 	ANDROID_KABI_RESERVE(4);
6644 };
6645 
rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta * sta,enum nl80211_band band,int index)6646 static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
6647 				 enum nl80211_band band,
6648 				 int index)
6649 {
6650 	return (sta == NULL || sta->deflink.supp_rates[band] & BIT(index));
6651 }
6652 
6653 static inline s8
rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band * sband,struct ieee80211_sta * sta)6654 rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6655 		  struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
6656 {
6657 	int i;
6658 
6659 	for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
6660 		if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
6661 			return i;
6662 
6663 	/* warn when we cannot find a rate. */
6664 	WARN_ON_ONCE(1);
6665 
6666 	/* and return 0 (the lowest index) */
6667 	return 0;
6668 }
6669 
6670 static inline
rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band * sband,struct ieee80211_sta * sta)6671 bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6672 			      struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
6673 {
6674 	unsigned int i;
6675 
6676 	for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
6677 		if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
6678 			return true;
6679 	return false;
6680 }
6681 
6682 /**
6683  * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver
6684  *
6685  * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass
6686  * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station
6687  * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on
6688  * the most recent rate control module decision.
6689  *
6690  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6691  * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination.
6692  * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station.
6693  */
6694 int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6695 			   struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
6696 			   struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates);
6697 
6698 int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
6699 void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
6700 
6701 static inline bool
conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf * conf)6702 conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6703 {
6704 	return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20;
6705 }
6706 
6707 static inline bool
conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf * conf)6708 conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6709 {
6710 	return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
6711 	       conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
6712 }
6713 
6714 static inline bool
conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf * conf)6715 conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6716 {
6717 	return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
6718 	       conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
6719 }
6720 
6721 static inline bool
conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf * conf)6722 conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6723 {
6724 	return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40;
6725 }
6726 
6727 static inline bool
conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf * conf)6728 conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6729 {
6730 	return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) &&
6731 		(conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) &&
6732 		(conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT);
6733 }
6734 
6735 static inline enum nl80211_iftype
ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type,bool p2p)6736 ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p)
6737 {
6738 	if (p2p) {
6739 		switch (type) {
6740 		case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION:
6741 			return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT;
6742 		case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP:
6743 			return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO;
6744 		default:
6745 			break;
6746 		}
6747 	}
6748 	return type;
6749 }
6750 
6751 static inline enum nl80211_iftype
ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif * vif)6752 ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
6753 {
6754 	return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p);
6755 }
6756 
6757 /**
6758  * ieee80211_update_mu_groups - set the VHT MU-MIMO groud data
6759  *
6760  * @vif: the specified virtual interface
6761  * @link_id: the link ID for MLO, otherwise 0
6762  * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
6763  * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
6764  *
6765  * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid and the position and
6766  * membership data is of the correct size and are in the same byte order as the
6767  * matching GroupId management frame.
6768  * Calls to this function need to be serialized with RX path.
6769  */
6770 void ieee80211_update_mu_groups(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, unsigned int link_id,
6771 				const u8 *membership, const u8 *position);
6772 
6773 void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6774 				   int rssi_min_thold,
6775 				   int rssi_max_thold);
6776 
6777 void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6778 
6779 /**
6780  * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface
6781  *
6782  * @vif: the specified virtual interface
6783  *
6784  * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid.
6785  *
6786  * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not
6787  * applicable.
6788  */
6789 int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6790 
6791 /**
6792  * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup
6793  * @vif: virtual interface
6794  * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s)
6795  * @gfp: allocation flags
6796  *
6797  * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup().
6798  */
6799 void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6800 				    struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup,
6801 				    gfp_t gfp);
6802 
6803 /**
6804  * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission
6805  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6806  * @vif: virtual interface
6807  * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver
6808  * @band: the band to transmit on
6809  * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to
6810  *
6811  * Note: must be called under RCU lock
6812  */
6813 bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6814 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb,
6815 			      int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta);
6816 
6817 /**
6818  * ieee80211_parse_tx_radiotap - Sanity-check and parse the radiotap header
6819  *				 of injected frames.
6820  *
6821  * To accurately parse and take into account rate and retransmission fields,
6822  * you must initialize the chandef field in the ieee80211_tx_info structure
6823  * of the skb before calling this function.
6824  *
6825  * @skb: packet injected by userspace
6826  * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
6827  */
6828 bool ieee80211_parse_tx_radiotap(struct sk_buff *skb,
6829 				 struct net_device *dev);
6830 
6831 /**
6832  * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state
6833  *
6834  * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change
6835  * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending
6836  *
6837  * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent
6838  *
6839  * private:
6840  *
6841  * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors
6842  * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA
6843  */
6844 struct ieee80211_noa_data {
6845 	u32 next_tsf;
6846 	bool has_next_tsf;
6847 
6848 	u8 absent;
6849 
6850 	u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
6851 	struct {
6852 		u32 start;
6853 		u32 duration;
6854 		u32 interval;
6855 	} desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
6856 };
6857 
6858 /**
6859  * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE
6860  *
6861  * @attr: P2P NoA IE
6862  * @data: NoA tracking data
6863  * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
6864  *
6865  * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors
6866  */
6867 int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr,
6868 			    struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
6869 
6870 /**
6871  * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change
6872  *
6873  * @data: NoA tracking data
6874  * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
6875  */
6876 void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
6877 
6878 /**
6879  * ieee80211_tdls_oper_request - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation
6880  * @vif: virtual interface
6881  * @peer: the peer's destination address
6882  * @oper: the requested TDLS operation
6883  * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown
6884  * @gfp: allocation flags
6885  *
6886  * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request().
6887  */
6888 void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer,
6889 				 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper,
6890 				 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp);
6891 
6892 /**
6893  * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID
6894  *
6895  * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from
6896  * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such
6897  * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID,
6898  * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks
6899  * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be
6900  * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC.
6901  *
6902  * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it
6903  * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should
6904  * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback.
6905  *
6906  * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for
6907  * @tid: the TID to reserve
6908  *
6909  * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure
6910  */
6911 int ieee80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
6912 
6913 /**
6914  * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID
6915  *
6916  * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function
6917  * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for
6918  * preventing use of this TID in the driver.
6919  *
6920  * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called
6921  * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called
6922  * from the driver's @sta_state callback.
6923  *
6924  * @sta: the station
6925  * @tid: the TID to unreserve
6926  */
6927 void ieee80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
6928 
6929 /**
6930  * ieee80211_tx_dequeue - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
6931  *
6932  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6933  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from
6934  *	ieee80211_next_txq()
6935  *
6936  * Returns the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available.
6937  *
6938  * Note that this must be called in an rcu_read_lock() critical section,
6939  * which can only be released after the SKB was handled. Some pointers in
6940  * skb->cb, e.g. the key pointer, are protected by RCU and thus the
6941  * critical section must persist not just for the duration of this call
6942  * but for the duration of the frame handling.
6943  * However, also note that while in the wake_tx_queue() method,
6944  * rcu_read_lock() is already held.
6945  *
6946  * softirqs must also be disabled when this function is called.
6947  * In process context, use ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni() instead.
6948  */
6949 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6950 				     struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
6951 
6952 /**
6953  * ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
6954  * (in process context)
6955  *
6956  * Like ieee80211_tx_dequeue() but can be called in process context
6957  * (internally disables bottom halves).
6958  *
6959  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6960  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from
6961  *	ieee80211_next_txq()
6962  */
ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct ieee80211_txq * txq)6963 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6964 						      struct ieee80211_txq *txq)
6965 {
6966 	struct sk_buff *skb;
6967 
6968 	local_bh_disable();
6969 	skb = ieee80211_tx_dequeue(hw, txq);
6970 	local_bh_enable();
6971 
6972 	return skb;
6973 }
6974 
6975 /**
6976  * ieee80211_next_txq - get next tx queue to pull packets from
6977  *
6978  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6979  * @ac: AC number to return packets from.
6980  *
6981  * Returns the next txq if successful, %NULL if no queue is eligible. If a txq
6982  * is returned, it should be returned with ieee80211_return_txq() after the
6983  * driver has finished scheduling it.
6984  */
6985 struct ieee80211_txq *ieee80211_next_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac);
6986 
6987 /**
6988  * ieee80211_txq_schedule_start - start new scheduling round for TXQs
6989  *
6990  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6991  * @ac: AC number to acquire locks for
6992  *
6993  * Should be called before ieee80211_next_txq() or ieee80211_return_txq().
6994  * The driver must not call multiple TXQ scheduling rounds concurrently.
6995  */
6996 void ieee80211_txq_schedule_start(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac);
6997 
6998 /* (deprecated) */
ieee80211_txq_schedule_end(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,u8 ac)6999 static inline void ieee80211_txq_schedule_end(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac)
7000 {
7001 }
7002 
7003 void __ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
7004 			      struct ieee80211_txq *txq, bool force);
7005 
7006 /**
7007  * ieee80211_schedule_txq - schedule a TXQ for transmission
7008  *
7009  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
7010  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
7011  *
7012  * Schedules a TXQ for transmission if it is not already scheduled,
7013  * even if mac80211 does not have any packets buffered.
7014  *
7015  * The driver may call this function if it has buffered packets for
7016  * this TXQ internally.
7017  */
7018 static inline void
ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct ieee80211_txq * txq)7019 ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq)
7020 {
7021 	__ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, true);
7022 }
7023 
7024 /**
7025  * ieee80211_return_txq - return a TXQ previously acquired by ieee80211_next_txq()
7026  *
7027  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
7028  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
7029  * @force: schedule txq even if mac80211 does not have any buffered packets.
7030  *
7031  * The driver may set force=true if it has buffered packets for this TXQ
7032  * internally.
7033  */
7034 static inline void
ieee80211_return_txq(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct ieee80211_txq * txq,bool force)7035 ieee80211_return_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
7036 		     bool force)
7037 {
7038 	__ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, force);
7039 }
7040 
7041 /**
7042  * ieee80211_txq_may_transmit - check whether TXQ is allowed to transmit
7043  *
7044  * This function is used to check whether given txq is allowed to transmit by
7045  * the airtime scheduler, and can be used by drivers to access the airtime
7046  * fairness accounting without going using the scheduling order enfored by
7047  * next_txq().
7048  *
7049  * Returns %true if the airtime scheduler thinks the TXQ should be allowed to
7050  * transmit, and %false if it should be throttled. This function can also have
7051  * the side effect of rotating the TXQ in the scheduler rotation, which will
7052  * eventually bring the deficit to positive and allow the station to transmit
7053  * again.
7054  *
7055  * The API ieee80211_txq_may_transmit() also ensures that TXQ list will be
7056  * aligned against driver's own round-robin scheduler list. i.e it rotates
7057  * the TXQ list till it makes the requested node becomes the first entry
7058  * in TXQ list. Thus both the TXQ list and driver's list are in sync. If this
7059  * function returns %true, the driver is expected to schedule packets
7060  * for transmission, and then return the TXQ through ieee80211_return_txq().
7061  *
7062  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
7063  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
7064  */
7065 bool ieee80211_txq_may_transmit(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
7066 				struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
7067 
7068 /**
7069  * ieee80211_txq_get_depth - get pending frame/byte count of given txq
7070  *
7071  * The values are not guaranteed to be coherent with regard to each other, i.e.
7072  * txq state can change half-way of this function and the caller may end up
7073  * with "new" frame_cnt and "old" byte_cnt or vice-versa.
7074  *
7075  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
7076  * @frame_cnt: pointer to store frame count
7077  * @byte_cnt: pointer to store byte count
7078  */
7079 void ieee80211_txq_get_depth(struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
7080 			     unsigned long *frame_cnt,
7081 			     unsigned long *byte_cnt);
7082 
7083 /**
7084  * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated - notify about NAN function termination.
7085  *
7086  * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function termination.
7087  * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
7088  *
7089  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
7090  * @inst_id: the local instance id
7091  * @reason: termination reason (one of the NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_*)
7092  * @gfp: allocation flags
7093  */
7094 void ieee80211_nan_func_terminated(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
7095 				   u8 inst_id,
7096 				   enum nl80211_nan_func_term_reason reason,
7097 				   gfp_t gfp);
7098 
7099 /**
7100  * ieee80211_nan_func_match - notify about NAN function match event.
7101  *
7102  * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function match. The
7103  * cookie inside the match struct will be assigned by mac80211.
7104  * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
7105  *
7106  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
7107  * @match: match event information
7108  * @gfp: allocation flags
7109  */
7110 void ieee80211_nan_func_match(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
7111 			      struct cfg80211_nan_match_params *match,
7112 			      gfp_t gfp);
7113 
7114 /**
7115  * ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for RX.
7116  *
7117  * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the
7118  * rate information in the RX status struct and the frame length.
7119  *
7120  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
7121  * @status: &struct ieee80211_rx_status containing the transmission rate
7122  *          information.
7123  * @len: frame length in bytes
7124  */
7125 u32 ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
7126 			      struct ieee80211_rx_status *status,
7127 			      int len);
7128 
7129 /**
7130  * ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for TX.
7131  *
7132  * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the
7133  * rate information in the TX info struct and the frame length.
7134  *
7135  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
7136  * @info: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
7137  * @len: frame length in bytes
7138  */
7139 u32 ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
7140 			      struct ieee80211_tx_info *info,
7141 			      int len);
7142 /**
7143  * ieee80211_set_hw_80211_encap - enable hardware encapsulation offloading.
7144  *
7145  * This function is used to notify mac80211 that a vif can be passed raw 802.3
7146  * frames. The driver needs to then handle the 802.11 encapsulation inside the
7147  * hardware or firmware.
7148  *
7149  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
7150  * @enable: indicate if the feature should be turned on or off
7151  */
7152 bool ieee80211_set_hw_80211_encap(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool enable);
7153 
7154 /**
7155  * ieee80211_get_fils_discovery_tmpl - Get FILS discovery template.
7156  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
7157  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
7158  *
7159  * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
7160  *
7161  * Return: FILS discovery template. %NULL on error.
7162  */
7163 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_get_fils_discovery_tmpl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
7164 						  struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
7165 
7166 /**
7167  * ieee80211_get_unsol_bcast_probe_resp_tmpl - Get unsolicited broadcast
7168  *	probe response template.
7169  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
7170  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
7171  *
7172  * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
7173  *
7174  * Return: Unsolicited broadcast probe response template. %NULL on error.
7175  */
7176 struct sk_buff *
7177 ieee80211_get_unsol_bcast_probe_resp_tmpl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
7178 					  struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
7179 
7180 /**
7181  * ieeee80211_obss_color_collision_notify - notify userland about a BSS color
7182  * collision.
7183  *
7184  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
7185  * @color_bitmap: a 64 bit bitmap representing the colors that the local BSS is
7186  *	aware of.
7187  * @gfp: allocation flags
7188  */
7189 void
7190 ieeee80211_obss_color_collision_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
7191 				       u64 color_bitmap, gfp_t gfp);
7192 
7193 /**
7194  * ieee80211_is_tx_data - check if frame is a data frame
7195  *
7196  * The function is used to check if a frame is a data frame. Frames with
7197  * hardware encapsulation enabled are data frames.
7198  *
7199  * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
7200  */
ieee80211_is_tx_data(struct sk_buff * skb)7201 static inline bool ieee80211_is_tx_data(struct sk_buff *skb)
7202 {
7203 	struct ieee80211_tx_info *info = IEEE80211_SKB_CB(skb);
7204 	struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (void *) skb->data;
7205 
7206 	return info->flags & IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP ||
7207 	       ieee80211_is_data(hdr->frame_control);
7208 }
7209 
7210 /**
7211  * ieee80211_set_active_links - set active links in client mode
7212  * @vif: interface to set active links on
7213  * @active_links: the new active links bitmap
7214  *
7215  * This changes the active links on an interface. The interface
7216  * must be in client mode (in AP mode, all links are always active),
7217  * and @active_links must be a subset of the vif's valid_links.
7218  *
7219  * If a link is switched off and another is switched on at the same
7220  * time (e.g. active_links going from 0x1 to 0x10) then you will get
7221  * a sequence of calls like
7222  *  - change_vif_links(0x11)
7223  *  - unassign_vif_chanctx(link_id=0)
7224  *  - change_sta_links(0x11) for each affected STA (the AP)
7225  *    (TDLS connections on now inactive links should be torn down)
7226  *  - remove group keys on the old link (link_id 0)
7227  *  - add new group keys (GTK/IGTK/BIGTK) on the new link (link_id 4)
7228  *  - change_sta_links(0x10) for each affected STA (the AP)
7229  *  - assign_vif_chanctx(link_id=4)
7230  *  - change_vif_links(0x10)
7231  *
7232  * Note: This function acquires some mac80211 locks and must not
7233  *	 be called with any driver locks held that could cause a
7234  *	 lock dependency inversion. Best call it without locks.
7235  */
7236 int ieee80211_set_active_links(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 active_links);
7237 
7238 /**
7239  * ieee80211_set_active_links_async - asynchronously set active links
7240  * @vif: interface to set active links on
7241  * @active_links: the new active links bitmap
7242  *
7243  * See ieee80211_set_active_links() for more information, the only
7244  * difference here is that the link change is triggered async and
7245  * can be called in any context, but the link switch will only be
7246  * completed after it returns.
7247  */
7248 void ieee80211_set_active_links_async(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
7249 				      u16 active_links);
7250 
7251 #endif /* MAC80211_H */
7252